JP6837537B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can shift to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Whether a game machine such as a pachinko game machine shifts to a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball wins (passes) in a predetermined area provided on the game board. There is a device that determines whether or not to move to the specific gaming state, and when a determination result indicating that the game is to be shifted to the specific gaming state is obtained. In the specific game state, the variable winning device provided on the game board changes from the closed state to the open state, and when a predetermined predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win a prize, the variable winning device is closed again (this). A series of such actions is called a "round game"). Then, when a game ball wins a prize in the variable winning device in the open state, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

Further, in the specific game state, such a round game is mainly executed a plurality of times, and the player can win more game balls in the open variable winning device for each round game. , You can get more game balls.

In such a game machine, when a game ball exceeding a specified number is won (over-winned) during a round game, over-winning and over-winning are achieved by changing the display content on the effect display device. A device configured to be able to notify the number of game balls played has been proposed (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-11239

However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, it is considered necessary to merely notify the result of over-winning, further increase the motivation for over-winning, and improve the interest of the game. ..

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving a more varied jackpot notice and improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A specific game state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to execute a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
The effect content determining means for determining the content of the effect for notifying the determination result of the specific game state determining means, and the effect content determining means.
An effect display means that can execute the effect determined by the effect content determining means in a game in which the identification information is changed.
An effect control means for controlling an effect executed by the effect display means,
And a specific display determining means for determining a specific display whether or not to display the effect display means for indicating that the contents of the effect varies executed by the effect display means,
The effect being executed can change the content of the effect based on the specific display.
The effect contents determination means,
Among the plurality of expectation types of executable a plurality step in one game, it is possible determine the expectation type being invoked,
The specific display is defined according to each type of expectation.
The effect control means
When the specific display is not determined to be displayed by the specific display determining means and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the specific stage To execute the production corresponding to the type of expectation of
A case of displaying the previous SL specific display by performing first display corresponding to the specific display along with the specific display, expected expectations types determined by the effect determining means of the specific steps If in degrees type, the changing contents of the effects not based on the specific display on the expectations types of expectations types by remote low stage of the particular stage, the contents of the effect based on the specific display after the it is possible to perform the first effect to change the expectations kind of the particular stage,
When the content of the effect is changed based on the specific display, a second display different from the first display corresponding to the specific display is displayed together with the specific display.
When the specific display is displayed and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the content of the effect is displayed without being based on the specific display. It is possible to perform a second effect that changes to a specific stage of expectation type,
It is characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in one game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice and improve the interest of the game.

It is external perspective view of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the game state and the effect mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the one-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of the sub-effect content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of the sub-effect content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit effect pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ST mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story production pattern change process in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item look-ahead effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item use effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate A use effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate B use effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate C use effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item acquisition effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example of the live bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example of the live bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example in a normal time of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story section of the ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story section of the ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the production pattern per story for SP bonus of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item look-ahead effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit effect pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the story production table group of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the main fluctuation time determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (variant example) of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the grand prize opening of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the game state and the effect mode of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specifications of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment (modification example) of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect execution decision table A of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention, (b) is the figure which shows the other embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table A of the game machine which concerns on this invention, and (c) shows the content of the specific suggestion effect display pattern A of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure. (A) is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect execution decision table B of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention, (b) is the figure which shows the other embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table B of the game machine which concerns on this invention, and (c) shows the content of the specific suggestion effect display pattern B of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure. (A) is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect execution decision table C of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention, (b) is the figure which shows the other embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table C of the game machine which concerns on this invention, and (c) shows the content of the specific suggestion effect display pattern C of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the specific suggestion effect of the game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.
1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base to which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (referred to as a player), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a detachable rear frame base plate (not shown), and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided in the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members that constitute the front frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In a state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right-side decorative member 15 and the left-side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation or diffused light having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be discharged from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays near the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball is full or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are moved from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. It is sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the game machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a has a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side is illegal, for example, a piano wire or the like. It is possible to envision a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member with respect to various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. The cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. At the same time, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for arranging the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b arranged on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the body frame, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided with a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d rotatably attached to the support portion and rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and a game ball provided in the support portion. A launch stop switch (not shown) that stops the launch of the steering wheel, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) that turns the launch stop switch ON / OFF, and a handle arranged so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. It has a cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launch driving device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown). It is known that the firing intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the electric power supplied to (omitted). However, in the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b is performed. A firing spring (not shown) interlocking with the firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring is increased or decreased to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of the rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. doing. The game board 1 is made of a material having translucency (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a material having no translucency such as plywood or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, and a passing gate 35. The first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first big winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the second big winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B located on the lower side of the large winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an out opening 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, and a lower movable effect. It includes a member 42B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40 The winning area is formed by. Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flowing region of the game ball in the game region 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31 or the like. In this process, the game ball is collected by winning any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and also If the prize is not won, or if the prize is not won after passing through the passing gate 35, the prize is collected by being discharged from the out port 41.

The winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, a favorable situation for the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc., which will be described later) is given. Means to do. At this time, the passage of the winning area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the winning area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out opening 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both passing the game ball to the winning area and winning the ball lead to winning, so in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "winning" is unified. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. In general, a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed hitting", and a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right-handed hitting".

The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins a prize, and also give an opportunity to display the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It is what you give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize the first starting area and the second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 33 and a second. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hit game state (big hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passing gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the second starting opening 33 and directly below the first large winning opening 36. The positions where the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game machine and the like.

The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontally long dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 36 is detected by the first winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 37 is detected by the second winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first large winning opening shutter 36A switches the first large winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening shutter 37A switches the second large winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second large winning opening 37 is moved in the closed state. It is arranged so as to cover it. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game ball winning the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 37 passes through either the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ball passage from the second winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes into an open state (first state) in which the V-winning of the game ball into the specific region 38A is easy, and a closed state (second state) in which V-winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning devices. It has been realized. The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize the second variable winning device.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability / non-probability / non-probability / non-time saving gaming states as normal game states controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. There are a probabilistic game state (special game state) in which the probability is higher than the non-time-saving game state and a time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving game state. If the lottery is won, the game shifts to the jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long (time saving game state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the probabilistic-changing gaming state and the normal gaming state which is the time-saving gaming state), and is not. It is designed not to shift to the probabilistic / non-time saving game state (the non-probability change game state and the non-time saving game state, which is the normal game state). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with the non-V winning without succeeding in V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state which is the non-probability changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is designed to move to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 180 times of special symbol lottery (180 times of variable display or stop display of special symbol) is performed in the probabilistic / short-time game state. It is designed to shift to a probabilistic / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of change display or stop display of special symbol) was performed in the non-probability change / time saving game state. , It is designed to shift to a non-probability / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered. In the following description, the probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a retracted state behind the game board 1 when not operating, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotational operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. With the cover member 43 attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second prize opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided on the front side edge portion of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B via the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, and the first 2. It has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamps and LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps, and the transition to the jackpot game state is confirmed. Lights (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during a part of the special symbol change in the game state or in the big hit game state. It has become like.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red when the LED lamp is won in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue when the LED lamp is lost in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 of the normal symbol display unit 51 is lit, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to win the second starting port 33. It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode. For example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or the blinking state is set, while in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the next and subsequent variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and the first The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of the symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins the second starting port 33, and the second special symbol display unit 54. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize the identification information display means.

The variation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is referred to as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" indicating that the game shifts to the non-probable and time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see FIG. 8). The hit symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is a nominal jackpot symbol such as "probability variation 1" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Yes (see Figure 8). That is, the hit symbol of the first special symbol has a jackpot symbol indicating that the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while the hit symbol of the second special symbol has the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is no jackpot symbol that indicates the transition to. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variation display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first start port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (the number of holds) that the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held in can be executed (the number of holds). The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (number of holds) is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. In the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the first start port 32 and the first are set. 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start storage (start storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 6) is the first special symbol start storage area (see 6). 1) -It is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 (the second special symbol start storage area ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored in 0) as the start memory (start memory information) is the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the maximum number of winning prizes held in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, is eight in total.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of winning a prize at the first starting port 32 and the holding of winning a prize at the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game described later when the big hit game state is executed.
The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "16R"), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game state having a number of rounds different from the above number of rounds is set, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on and the other LED lamps are turned off. Can be done. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed.
Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, it is described as, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R", and when it means the latter, it is described as, for example, "16th round". Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, such as an identification symbol for production, a production image in the normal game state, and a production during the big hit game state. It displays an image, a production image for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on condition that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 form the effect executing means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as notification means.

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 6, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state transition determination means (first specific game state transition determination means and second specific game state transition determination means), specific game state control means, special game state control means. , And round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means) are realized.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 are regarded as winning when it detects that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, and give a predetermined detection signal. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to grasp that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of winning balls are performed by the payout device 83.

The first large winning opening count switch 360 arranged behind the first large winning opening 36 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower side. Pay out to the plate 18.

The second major winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second winning opening 37 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17. Alternatively, pay out to the lower plate 18.

These 1st big winning opening count switch 360 and 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37. It is supplied to the circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a V prize is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific region switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that the non-specific region switch 380B has won a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific region 38B in the jackpot gaming state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. Then, in a situation where the first prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second prize opening 37, and the game ball is won. Is driven to change into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the part 54 and is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the game state other than the time-saving game state (“non-probability variation / non-time-saving game state” in this embodiment) is 0 (for example, lottery). The non-winning is decided), and the blade member 34 is not opened. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 1/1 (for example, the winning is determined without being drawn), and when this is won, the blade member 34 is 1. . Opened 3 times for 3 seconds.

The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific region 38A. As a result, when the round game described later is being executed in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending special symbols are displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. When the game ball wins a prize and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of the first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the 2nd special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the 2nd special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start memory.

Therefore, the total number of reserved game balls related to the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

In the open state of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the first large winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, nine winnings). It is maintained until either one of the conditions is satisfied, such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first large winning opening 36. Will be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is nine). However, it is maintained until either of the conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big winning opening 37. Will be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on the preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 will be opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

Although the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state may be provided. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and for example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be open only once. However, when the small hit game state is provided, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled so as to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state may be shifted to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state may be used. It may be returned to.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the numbered "rounds" such as the first round or the first round are simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, and the like. May be omitted with the character "". In addition, in one round game, if the maximum number of prizes per round is reached before the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the first prize opening is opened. The 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37 are closed, and the round game is ended without opening the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37 for the remaining number of times of opening.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball tentatively wins in the second large winning opening 37. Even if this is done, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the jackpot game state (specific game state) include the jackpot game state including the specific round game (first specific game state) and the jackpot game state not including the specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Designs (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is put into a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the first starting area (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second starting area (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the first or second specific game state transition determination means. Functions as.

Further, the main CPU 61 determines that, on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state ends, the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means. Functions as a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (probability variation game state) in which is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first large winning opening shutter 36A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the first round game (round). It functions as a first round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game execution means, can control the first variable winning device to be changed to the first mode and the second mode during at least one first round game execution.

Further, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific game state in the second round game (round). It functions as a second round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the second round game execution means, has a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the second variable winning device to pass the game medium through the specific area 38A during at least one second round game execution. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control for changing to the first aspect and the second aspect is performed. Further, during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which it is relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area 38A. It is also possible to control.

In the jackpot game state, the first round game execution means executes the first specified number of first round games, and then the second round game execution means executes at least one specific second round game. 1 specific game state, and a second specific game state in which the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means and then the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means. After the first round game execution means executes the first round game of the second specific number of times more than the first specific number of times, the second round game execution means executes at least one specific second round game. 3 Specific game states, and a 4th specific game state in which the 2nd round game execution means does not execute the specific 2nd round game after the 2nd specific number of 1st round games are executed by the 1st round game execution means. A specific game state including is realized.

A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including functions as the means of the main CPU 61 described above.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal plate 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first special winning opening count switch 360, and a second major winning opening count switch 370. , Specified area switch 380A, non-specific area switch 380B, general winning opening left switch 400A, general winning opening right switch 400B, and backup clear switch 81.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to each other. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value-adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls for each prize to the first starting port 32, and one game ball as the number of prize balls for each prize to the second starting port 33. Is paid out, 10 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per prize in the general prize opening 40, and 14 prize balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per prize in the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37. Pay out the game ball.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 is a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that commands are supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to a movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, a push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected to the sub-control circuit 70. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button switch 90A to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, a prior notification means, a schedule grant quantity determination means, a notification quantity change means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 realize the storage means. The production pattern selection means includes the music pattern selection means.

The liquid crystal display device 4 displays a round number notification image (for example, an icon indicating the number of rounds) for at least a part of the number of times the round game is executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the specific game state. ) Functions as a display means that can be displayed. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

The sub CPU 71 executes a predetermined specific game state (a round game that changes the first special winning opening 36 into an open mode and a closed mode a plurality of times by the specific game state transition determination means, and opens the second special winning opening 37. The specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means on the condition that it is decided to shift to the jackpot game state in which the round game changed to the mode and the closed mode is executed at least once). Previously, it functions as an advance notification means capable of executing advance notification notifying that the specific second round game is executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution time of the advance notification by the advance notification means.

The sub CPU 71 is the number of real round games (round games that facilitate the winning of the first large winning opening 36) executed by the first round game execution means (main CPU 61) in the specific game state, and the real round. The maximum number of game media accepted (maximum number of prizes) to the first variable winning device (first large winning opening 36) specified for each number of games, and the acceptance of the game media to the first variable winning device. It is executed by the number of game value (game balls) given by the game value giving means (payout device 83) (number of prize balls) and the second round game execution means (main CPU 61) for each number (number of prizes). The number of real round games (a round game that makes it easy to win the second big winning opening 37) and the second variable winning device (the second big winning opening) specified for the number of times of the real round game. Based on the maximum number of game media accepted to 37) (maximum number of prizes) and the number of game values given by the game value-giving means for each number of game media accepted to the second variable winning device. It functions as a means for determining the planned grant quantity for determining the planned grant quantity of the game value.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notification means capable of notifying a part of the planned grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means, and the sub CPU 71 schedules the quantity notified by the notification means. It functions as a notification quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the planned grant quantity determined by the grant quantity determining means.

The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of the specific game state (big hit game state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 produce the effect. Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as an effect execution means capable of executing the effect in the specific game state.

The sub CPU 71 has a plurality of music patterns (for example, music pattern A (success), music pattern A (reversal), music pattern A (failure), music pattern B (success), music pattern in a specific game state (big hit game state). It functions as a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from B (reversal), music pattern B (failure), and music pattern C (confirmation)), and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are selected by the music pattern selection means. It functions as a music output means for outputting music according to the music pattern in a special gaming state.

The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect (item effect) described later, determines the effect content in the item look-ahead effect (item effect), and controls the progress of the item look-ahead effect (item effect). The effect control means functions as an item advance notification determining means for determining whether or not to perform the advance notification effect described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 are item look-ahead effects (item effect). ) And the item effect execution means for executing the advance notification effect.

The sub CPU 71 functions as a story effect control means for controlling the progress of a series of story effects and related story effects described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 are used for the series of story effects and the lamp / LED 27. Execute related story production Functions as a story production execution means.

A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the sound (sound, music, etc.) output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that controls the sound and sound data that stores various sound data. It includes a ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying sound signals. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and is one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs the sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9, for example, in the big hit game state. Etc.) to control the production operation.

[Game state and production mode of the game machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode as the effect modes in the normal gaming state. The time saving mode has a relatively large number of short modes and a short mode that impresses that the time saving mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, that is, the number of games of the special symbol game). There is a long mode that impresses the number of games. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the production mode in the big hit game state, the first special symbol is being hit, the live bonus, the story bonus, and the battle bonus, and the second special symbol is being hit, the SP bonus. Is implemented.

The normal mode is a production mode in which the game is in a non-probable and non-time-saving game state. The normal mode is an effect mode in which the user stays when neither the time saving mode, the ST mode, the first special symbol hitting, or the second special symbol hitting is in progress. For example, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game of 4 times (short mode) or 100 times (long mode) is digested, the time saving mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the ST mode, when the special symbol game 180 times (specified number of times) is digested, the ST mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, the live bonus and the story bonus are being hit by the first special symbol. , Or shift to a battle bonus. In the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the second special symbol described above, the SP bonus is being applied to the second special symbol. May migrate.

Further, as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but when the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed. , When it is confirmed that the jackpot symbol corresponds to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol, and the stop display is displayed as the combination mode of "3", the "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol is displayed. If the jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability change 6" is highly expected and stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "2", "4", or "6", the first special symbol "probability change 1" The expectation that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to "Probability change 6" is low. Further, when the stop display is displayed as a combination mode of "1" or "5", the expectation degree of the jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is "2". , "4", or "6" is higher than the case where the stop display is displayed, and is lower than the case where the stop display is displayed as the combination mode of "3". However, as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, the combination mode other than the combination mode of "7" may be stopped and displayed. As described above, when shifting from the normal mode to the SP bonus, which is in the process of hitting the second special symbol, the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, and the second special symbol is displayed. It is confirmed that the jackpot symbol corresponds to "probability change 1".

The normal stage and the special stage in the normal mode are production stages that are elements that determine the production mode in the non-probability and non-time saving game state, and the result of the jackpot determination is a predetermined result, and the special symbol game is played a predetermined number of times. They migrate to each other when they have been digested or when transition conditions such as the passage of a predetermined predetermined time are met. The decorative pattern image data, the background image data, the frequency of the effect, the appearance rate of the specific effect, and the like can be different between the normal stage and the special stage. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in the normal mode from losing the interest in the game.

The time saving mode is a non-probable and time saving gaming state production mode. The time reduction mode corresponds to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" when the jackpot symbols corresponding to the first special symbols "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" are stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. It is executed after the end of the jackpot game state. For example, after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 5", 100 times are given as the number of games until the special symbol game of 100 times is basically digested. Will be continued. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbols of "time reduction 2" to "time reduction 4", the number of games is given four times until basically four special symbol games are digested. Will be continued. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol or the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the final non-V prize is awarded. If this happens, the mode shifts to the time reduction mode of 100 times in the same manner as in "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 5". As described above, the time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit game state when the non-V prize is finally obtained in the big hit game state.

In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7", the effect mode shifts to the SP bonus, which is hitting the second special symbol. In the time saving mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbol is "7" is the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. However, in the time saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. Further, in the time saving mode, the game shifts to the normal mode when the special symbol game of 4 or 100 times given as the number of games is digested without the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed. In the time saving mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (during hitting the first special symbol). , Live bonus, story bonus, or battle bonus). In this case, as a combination mode of the decorative symbols, a combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed, and a jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol is displayed. Is shown to be.

The short mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is four, and even if the number of games is 100, up to the fourth time, which is the beginning of the game. Is to be executed. The long mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given is 100 times. For example, when the number of games is the fourth or later from the start of the time saving mode, the short mode is executed. It may be executed with an effect mode that impresses the promotion from.

The ST mode is a production mode of a probabilistic and time-saving game state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the game state to the probabilistic game state (ST game state) after the end of the big hit game state that finally won the V prize. Is to be done. The ST mode is basically given 180 times as the number of games, and basically continues until 180 special symbol games are digested.

In the ST mode, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7", the SP bonus shifts to the second special symbol hit, as in the case of the time saving mode. However, even in the ST mode, as a jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed, and the time saving mode and the ST mode may be displayed. Then, the combination mode of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed may be different. For example, in one mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbol is "7" is made to correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, and in the other mode, the decorative symbol is "1". The combination mode of ~ "7" may correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. Even in the ST mode, if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (per first special symbol). In some cases, it may shift to live bonus, story bonus, or battle bonus. In this case, as a combination mode of the decorative symbols, a combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed, and a jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol is displayed. Is shown to be.

The story section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the V prize is finally obtained in the jackpot game state, and basically 51 special symbol games are digested. Will continue until. In this story section, a series of story productions are executed over a total of 10 sets, with 5 games as one set. In addition, the remaining number of games, one, is used to execute the effect (for example, title display) at the time of introduction of the series of stories at the beginning of the series of story effects to be executed. In the series of story productions executed in this story section, the story progresses even within the 50 games, and the story progresses each time it is executed in the series of story production units. A series of story productions progresses when the jackpot game state is so-called "ream villa" in the ST mode.

The battle reach section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the story section of the ST mode, and basically continues until the end of the ST mode. In this battle reach section, an effect of displaying the battle scene of one character (for example, a ally character) and another character (for example, an enemy character) is executed, and it is determined to perform reach as the effect content. Then, a battle effect between the one character and the other character is executed, and the result of the jackpot determination is notified by displaying the victory or defeat. In addition, in this battle reach section, when it is decided to perform reach as the production content, the battle production will be performed regardless of the result of the jackpot judgment (winning), but in the above-mentioned story section, the production content Even if it is decided to reach, if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the progress of the story is prioritized and no special notification is given. In this way, in the ST mode, the story section and the battle reach section are provided so that different notifications are performed to improve the player's interest in the game.

The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) to be referred to may be different between the story section and the battle reach section in the ST mode. That is, in the ST mode (ST game state), the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with different selection probabilities according to the production mode (story section and battle reach section).
Specifically, in the story section of the ST mode, a fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened fluctuation) associated with a short fluctuation time (for example, 2s) has a high probability so that the progress of a series of story production is prioritized. The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) selected in is referred to, and in the battle reach section of the ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, normal) associated with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 6s) is associated. The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) in which the variation) is selected with high probability may be referred to. In the story section of the ST mode, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which the selection probability of the variation pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol game is executed may be referred to, and the battle in the ST mode may be referred to. In the reach section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which the selection probability of the variation pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol game is executed may be referred to.

As for the live bonus during the first special symbol hit, the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol are the hit patterns 1 and 2 (substantial 9R), the hit pattern 3 (substantial 5R), the hit pattern 7 (substantial 8R), and the hit pattern 8. This is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game states corresponding to (substantially 4R) and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot game states. In this live bonus, a predetermined song (any of the song patterns A to C) according to the type of a more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46) is selected, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are used. It is output. Further, in conjunction with the output of the selected predetermined music, the effect of the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 and the effect of the light emission mode of the lamp / LED 27 are executed. In the live bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit patterns 1 to 3 at the end of the production mode, it is notified that the specific second round game is executed, and the hit pattern 7 Or, if it is 8, it is notified that the specific second round game is not executed.

During the first special symbol hit, it indicates that the game is in a big hit game state related to the first special symbol, and depending on the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol), the live bonus, the story bonus, and the battle bonus production mode There is. During the first special symbol hit, it is executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is also executed when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. After the end of the first special symbol hit, if the player has a V prize in the big hit game state, the mode shifts to the ST mode, and if the player has a non-V prize, the mode shifts to the time saving mode.

The story bonus during the first special symbol hit is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 4 (substantial 5R) and the hit pattern 9 (substantial 4R). This is an effect mode that is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot game states. In this story bonus, a predetermined story production according to the type of hit pattern (may be a story production related to a series of story productions executed in the above-mentioned story section, or may be an unrelated story production). Is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In the story bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 4, it is notified that the specific second round game is executed at the final stage of the production mode, which is the hit pattern 9. In that case, it is notified that the specific second round game is not executed.

The battle bonus during the first special symbol hit is the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit patterns 5 and 6 (substantially 5R) and the hit patterns 10 and 11 (substantially 0R). This is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with each other and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot game states. In this battle bonus, a predetermined battle effect according to the type of hit pattern (may be a battle effect related to the battle effect executed in the above-mentioned battle reach section, or may be an unrelated battle effect). It is selected and executed by the effect executing means. In the battle bonus, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 5 or 6, in the middle of the production mode, the specific second round game is executed and the first round game is executed. If the hit pattern is 10 or 11, it is notified that the specific second round game and the first round game are not executed.

During the second special symbol hit, it indicates that the game is in the big hit game state related to the second special symbol, and the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol) (in the present embodiment, it is one of the hit patterns 12). Depending on (but not limited to), there is an SP bonus production mode. During the second special symbol hit, it is executed when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. Further, as described above, it may be executed even when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. After the end of the second special symbol hit, the V prize is basically easy to win in all the big hit game states, so the mode shifts to the ST mode. Although not shown in FIG. 7, if a non-V prize is won in the jackpot game state, the mode will be shifted to the time saving mode.

The SP bonus during the second special symbol hit is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 12 (substantially 16R), and impresses this jackpot game state. This is an effect mode executed as an effect mode. In this SP bonus, it is notified that the specific second round game is basically executed and that the first round game is executed the most number of times as compared with other jackpot game states. In the SP bonus, when the second special symbol is hit in the time saving mode, the SP bonus hitting effect pattern in which the effect mode impressing the promotion from the time saving mode to the ST mode is executed is determined, and the ST mode is determined. When the second special symbol hits in the story section of, the production pattern per story related to the SP bonus is determined to execute the production mode that impresses the "renso" in the ST mode, and the battle reach section in the ST mode. In the case of the second special symbol hit, the SP bonus battle hit effect pattern in which the effect mode impressing the pullback of the big hit in the ST mode is executed is determined.

It should be noted that even if the production modes are not shown and explained, the transition is possible with the transition of the gaming state, and the mode is not limited to the range shown and explained.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the special symbol is 1 / 297.89 (220/65536) at the time of low probability (non-probability changing game state) and at the time of high probability (probability changing game state). ) Is 1 / 122.96 (533/65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 180 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the winning pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that can easily win the big winning opening is 9R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode of the jackpot game state, and the production content is "live bonus 9R success". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 46/200 (hit patterns 1-1 to 46).

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 9R), the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 9R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 3" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R), the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 5R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol is set to 18/200 (hit pattern 3-1 to 18).

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 4" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 4, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R), the story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "story bonus 5R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 4" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit pattern 4-1 to 17).

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 5" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 5, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R), the battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "battle bonus 5R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/200 (hit pattern 5-1 to 20).

In the jackpot symbol "Probability change 6" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 6, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R), the battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "battle bonus 5R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is set to 2/200 (hit patterns 6-1 and 2).

In the jackpot symbol "Time saving 1" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 7, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 8R), the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 8R". It is "failure". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time saving 1" of the first special symbol is set to 16/200 (hit pattern 7-1 to 16).

In the jackpot symbol "Time saving 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 8, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "live bonus 4R". It is "failure". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 2" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit pattern 8-1 to 17).

In the jackpot symbol "Time saving 3" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 9, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "story bonus 4R". It is "failure". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 3" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit pattern 9-1 to 17).

In the jackpot symbol "time reduction 4" or "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 10 or 11, and the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 0R). The content is "Battle Bonus 0R Failure". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 4" or "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol is set to 23/200 (hit pattern 10-1 to 23 or hit pattern 11-1 to 23).

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 1" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 12, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 16R), the SP bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "SP bonus 16R". ". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is set to 1/1 (that is, 100%).

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 9 for both the 1st major winning opening 36 and the 2nd major winning opening 37. The time-saving performance (specification of the time-saving game state) is set so that the time-saving game state continues up to 100 times or 4 times during a high probability (while in the probability-changing game state) or in the non-probability-changing game state. .. The number of prize balls is 3 for each prize in the first starting port 32, 1 for each prize in the 2nd starting port 33, and 10 for each prize in the general winning opening 40. The number of prizes is set to 14 for each prize in the prize openings (first prize opening 36 and second prize opening 37).

The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0 at a low probability and 1/1 at a high probability. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one-round opening / closing patterns (one-round opening / closing patterns) in the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are simply referred to as the large winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The opening / closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the specific time for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the figure.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222 s.
The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in other opening / closing patterns, the round section is defined as the period from the first open state to the final closed state. In the section where the open state is 27.222 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively long and long open.
That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.222 s.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 2.898 s, and then the open state continues for 27.222 s again. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively short, which is a short opening.
That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, after the short opening occurs once, the long opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 27.324 s. In the open state where the short opening is made, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball into the large winning opening, while in the open state where the long opening is made, it is possible and easy to win the game ball into the large winning opening. ing. Such short opening is the same in the opening / closing pattern C described later.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern C is such that the short opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 0.102 s.

As described above, the substantial round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern A or B described above. Then, the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second special winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 10, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period of opening the specific area 38A for 0.102 s for the first time. It is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 2.898 s, and then the operation period continues for a maximum of 29.222 s. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 32.222s. During the operation period of 0.102s, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that it is relatively easy to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. Regarding the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, in one round in which the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number, the second large winning opening 37 is closed. When the state is reached and the predetermined monitoring processing time for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 is inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum 29.222 s has elapsed. May become.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 12 are defined as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). Winning patterns 1 and 2 occur at the time of live bonus (live bonus 9R success), and the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as "specified number of rounds") is 16R, and the big winning opening This is a hit pattern in which the actual number of rounds that can be won is defined as 9R. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the last big winning opening is closed in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the inter-round interval pattern, an interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which the closed state is 102 ms are defined. In the hit patterns 1 and 2, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 opens / closes at the 1st to 8th rounds. It is specified to be pattern A. That is, the hit patterns 1 and 2 are 9 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is 1R to 8R and 10R, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a live bonus (successful live bonus 5R), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 5R. In the hit pattern 3, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 4th rounds. It is stipulated to be. That is, in the hit pattern 3, the actual number of rounds is 5 rounds of the 1st to 4th R and the 10th R, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 4 occurs at the time of the story bonus (success of the story bonus 5R), and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the hit pattern 4, all round-to-round intervals are interval patterns b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 4th rounds. It is stipulated to be. That is, the hit pattern 4 has 5 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th R and the 10th R, and only the 10R is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit patterns 5 and 6 occur at the time of a battle bonus (successful battle bonus 5R), and are hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the hit patterns 5 and 6, the inter-round interval between the 1st to 10th rounds is the interval pattern a, the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the second big winning opening 37 is at the 10th round. It is stipulated that the opening / closing pattern B is formed and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 11th to 14th rounds. That is, the hit patterns 5 and 6 are 5 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 10th to 14th rounds, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a live bonus (live bonus 8R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 8R. In the hit pattern 7, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 8th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 7 is 8 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 8th rounds, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 8, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 4th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 8 is 4 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th rounds, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit pattern 9 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of a story bonus (story bonus 4R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is defined as 4R. In the hit pattern 9, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 4th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 9 is 4 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th rounds, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit patterns 10 and 11 occur at the time of a battle bonus (battle bonus 0R failure), and are hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 0R. In the hit patterns 10 and 11, the inter-round interval between the 1st to 10th rounds is the interval pattern a, the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the first in all of the 1st to 16th rounds. The large winning opening 36 is defined to have an opening / closing pattern C. That is, in the hit patterns 10 and 11, the actual number of rounds is 0R, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the SP bonus (live bonus 16R), and the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is also 16R. In the hit pattern 12, all round-to-round intervals are interval patterns b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th R, and the first big winning opening at the 1st to 9th R and 11th to 16th R. 36 is specified to be the opening / closing pattern A.
That is, the hit pattern 12 is 16 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the same as the specified number of rounds, and is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy only in the 10th round.

In addition, in the hit patterns 1 to 6 and 12, a round (specific second round game) in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed only in the 10th round, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The specific second round game may be executed in other rounds (1st to 9th rounds, 11th to 16th rounds). Further, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned hit patterns including these hit patterns, the second big winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (usually a second round game) in which it is difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed. May be. Further, in FIG. 11, as the interval between rounds, the portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b, or the location where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a. That is, various modifications are made according to the production mode in the jackpot game state (the first special symbol is being hit, the live bonus, the story bonus, the battle bonus, or the second special symbol is being hit, the SP bonus). It can be performed.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. The table defines lottery value (random number value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the "random number value" may be simply referred to as a "random number".

<Sub-production content determination table>
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a part of the sub-effect content determination table. The sub-effect content determination table is a table referred to in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 41 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and a jackpot determination is made for each effect mode (or for each game state). Various results (winning), current game status (non-probability / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probability variation / time reduction), type of variation pattern specification command, random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value), etc. The type of effect pattern (sub-effect content) to be determined is defined according to the parameters. The sub-effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is defined in the sub-effect content determination table in order to explain the item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 43 to 48 and 69 to 71 described later) in the present embodiment. This is an excerpt of a part of the item look-ahead effect to be performed, and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect and other effect contents are not limited to this. The item look-ahead effect is an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is determined that a big hit is achieved by displaying an item (for example, plates A to D described later).

In the sub-effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the effect patterns of the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, are defined, and 1 is based on the respective selection probabilities (random number range for sub-effect selection). The production pattern of is decided. Further, in the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D are defined as a plurality of items, and the number (number of sheets) of each plate is specified. ing. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the item look-ahead effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, include a pseudo-continuous effect described later as a plurality of expectation types, a dialogue effect described later, and a dialogue effect described later. A cut-in effect and other promotion (reversal) effects described later are stipulated, and the degree of expectation (the stage indicating the level of the degree of expectation) is stipulated. Here, the plate A corresponds to the pseudo-continuous production as the expectation type, the plate B corresponds to the dialogue production as the expectation type, and the plate C corresponds to the cut-in production as the expectation type. The plate D corresponds to other promotion (reversal) effects as an expectation type. The expectation type is the effect itself that notifies different types of expectations in each effect that constitutes a part of the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the effect executed in the item use effect process described later). It indicates the stage of the degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation of whether or not it is decided that the item look-ahead effect as a whole will be a big hit will be determined by combining these degrees of expectation.

<Hit production pattern determination table>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table. The hit effect pattern determination table is a table referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 49 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and the hit effect determined according to the lottery value for each type of the hit pattern. The type of pattern is specified. In the hit effect pattern determination table, as the types of hit effect patterns, music patterns A to C constituting the live bonus, story patterns D and E constituting the story bonus, and battle patterns F and G constituting the battle bonus are defined. ing. The lottery value defines the lottery value information when the random number range is 32768, and the lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768, that is, 100%. However, the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 shows an example, and the defined lottery value information (lottery rate) is not limited to this.

In addition to the music pattern A, the music pattern A (success) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 9R, the music pattern A (reversal) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 5R, the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 8R, and the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 4R. There is a hit effect pattern of A (failure). That is, when the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (reversal) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the stage shifts to the ST mode (special game state) after the end of the big hit game state. .. On the other hand, when the music pattern A (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the mode does not shift to the ST mode but shifts to the time saving mode after the end of the big hit game state.

In addition to the music pattern B, the music pattern B (success) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 9R, the music pattern B (reversal) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 5R, the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 8R, and the music pattern that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 4R. There is a hit effect pattern of B (failure). That is, when the music pattern B (success) or the music pattern B (reversal) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the stage shifts to the ST mode (special game state) after the end of the big hit game state. .. On the other hand, when the music pattern B (failure) is determined as the hit effect pattern, it is basically determined that the mode does not shift to the ST mode but shifts to the time saving mode after the end of the big hit game state.

The music pattern C is one type of the music pattern C (confirmed), and when the music pattern C (confirmed) is determined as the hit effect pattern, basically the ST mode (special game state) is performed after the jackpot game state ends. ) Is confirmed. The music patterns A to C are music patterns in which different music is output, and the degree of expectation that the transition to the ST mode (special game state) is determined differs depending on the type of the output music. It has become.

Music pattern A (success) is associated with hit patterns 1-1 to 8 (ie, eight hit patterns), and music pattern A (failure) is associated with hit patterns 7-1 to 12 (ie, twelve hit patterns). It is associated with the hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern in which the first round game for 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed, and then the specific second round game for 1R minutes (10R) is executed, and the hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern 7. , This is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game for 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined and the first round game for 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 on 8/20. It becomes%.

Further, the music pattern A (reversal) is associated with the hit patterns 3-1 to 6 (that is, 6 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is the hit patterns 8-1 to 9 (that is, 9). It is associated with the hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern in which the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, and then the specific second round game for 1R minutes (10R) is executed, and the hit pattern 8 is This is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined and the first round game for 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 40 on 6/15. It becomes%.

Music pattern B (success) is associated with hit patterns 1-9 to 14 (ie, 6 hit patterns), and music pattern B (failure) is associated with hit patterns 7-13 to 16 (ie, 4 hit patterns). It is associated with the hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined and the first round game for 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 60 at 6/10. It becomes%.

Further, the music pattern B (reversal) is associated with the hit patterns 3-7 to 18 (that is, 12 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 8-10 to 17 (that is, 8). It is associated with the hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined and the first round game for 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is 60 on 12/20. It becomes%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific first when the music pattern B is selected rather than the expectation (40%) that the specific second round game is executed when the music pattern A is selected. It is configured so that the expectation (60%) that the two-round game is executed is higher. With this configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between songs, and it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the live bonus (specific game state).

For example, in the music pattern A, when the first round game for 4R minutes (1 to 4R) is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (that is, the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 8 is determined. 8R minutes (1) than the expectation that the music pattern A (reversal) is selected when either the music pattern A (reversal) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected when the music pattern A (reversal) is selected. ~ 8R) When the first round game is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (that is, when the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 7 is determined, the music pattern A (success)) And the degree of expectation that the music pattern A (success) is selected when any of the music pattern B (failure) is selected may be higher.

Specifically, the music pattern A (reversal) is associated with the hit pattern 3 (that is, 18 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is associated with the hit pattern 8 (that is, 17 hit patterns). , Music pattern A (success) may be associated with hit pattern 1 (that is, 46 hit patterns), and music pattern A (failure) may be associated with hit pattern 7 (that is, 16 hit patterns). In this case, when either the music pattern A (reversal) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200), the music pattern A (reversal) is expected to be selected (for example). It is expected that the music pattern A (success) occupying the case where either the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected rather than 18/35) (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected. The degree (eg, 46/62) can be increased. With this configuration, the second intersection of the music pattern A (for example, the B melody of the second section described later) is output after the elapse of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later). Since the expectation that the specific second round game is executed is relatively high, the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later) can be diversified, and the jackpot game state (for example, the first branch section described later) can be diversified. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the specific game state).

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34.

[Main processing by main CPU]
15 and 16 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 15, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs the sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 16) when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and shifts to S16 when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S17 when it determines that there is a power failure detection flag, and shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 16) when it determines that there is no power failure detection flag. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19 when it determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, and shifts the process to S30 when it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs the probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 displays that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S24, and the processing is returned to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and a large winning opening for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening that opens when a big hit occurs. Various types of timers, such as an open time timer and a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of a security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80 when it is detected that there is an illegal act. Executes the process of updating the timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 sets the hit determination random value and the hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330. Is extracted, the jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 is referred to, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. Do. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to use the lost symbol or the hit symbol based on the hit probability of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8) according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and determines whether to use the lost symbol or the hit symbol. Performs the process of storing the result. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. .. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. The main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 (illustrated). (Omitted) may be used to determine whether to use a lost symbol or a hit symbol. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Performs the process of storing in. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. Based on the received control signal, the LED unit 5 causes the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner and a stop display. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs the symbol hold number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switches 320 and the second, which are detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 19) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps or the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and a second grand prize. It supplies solenoid power for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and opens and closes the blade member 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 17, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 enters the system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. When, for example, the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first prize opening 36, the second prize opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and also sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 18, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (3 times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for timing various execution waiting times. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first prize opening 36 to the first prize opening count switch 360, or a ball passage from the second prize opening 37 to the second prize opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual spheres remaining in the switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S73. If the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch when the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77 when it determines that the specific area 38A is not open, and shifts the process to S76 when it determines that the specific area 38A is open.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closure data.
In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so as to close the specific region 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer becomes "0" after the second big winning opening 37 finishes the long opening (the section where the opening state is 27.222s) and becomes the closed state. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 28.320 s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged by winning a prize in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80 when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it is S78. Move the process to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set in the residual ball monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but the same value or a larger value (longer time) may be set.

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates this timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter used to identify the 10th R opening / closing of the second large winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter does not count the number of times that the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are actually opened, but is added by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S82 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "10". If so, the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter. The second large winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening 37 detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second large winning opening winning counter and the value of the ejection ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second winning opening winning counter becomes If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process is transferred to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the time when the game ball is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 to the time when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the 2nd big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the ball is clogged inside the 2nd big winning opening 37 or the 2nd big due to so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command.
The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the power has not been discharged normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S91. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do it.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, a process of outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting winning opening switch 320 or the second winning opening switch 320 or the second. When it is determined that the start opening winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 20, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs the first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs the second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs the first large winning opening switch check process.
This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs the second big winning opening switch check process.
This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this process is completed, this special symbol-related switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 21, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the first start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 22, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S121, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random value of is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first winning opening count switch 360. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S131 and detects the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. If it is determined that this is not the case, the first large winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first large winning opening winning counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first grand prize opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first grand winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the first large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a second large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 24, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second winning opening count switch 370. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S141 and detects the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second large winning opening winning counter. The second major winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second major winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, it shifts the process to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The large winning opening opening counter is as described above.
In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "10". If so, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening. ), The process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is "05H" or "06H", it shifts the process to S148, and when it determines that the control state flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0", it shifts the process to S149 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0". The process is transferred to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may try to do it.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag whose value is set as "01H" when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H", it shifts the process to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is not "01H", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) in the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V prize in the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball into the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, it shifts the process to S153 and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second large winning opening switch check processing routine and ends the second large winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this process is completed, the second large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 25, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63.
The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the determination. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process.
In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the first grand prize read from the main ROM 62 The data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second prize-winning mouth shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 16, the main CPU 61 receives data and a displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read out, and control signals based on these data are supplied to the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.222s of the opening / closing pattern A) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening / closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating a winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening when it is not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process.
In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 indicates the end of the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, the end of one game from the external terminal board 801). (Processing for outputting a game end signal, a big hit signal indicating that a big hit game state is in progress, etc.) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this processing is completed, the special symbol control processing routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), (02H), and (07H) when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case where the game is not in the big hit game state. As a result, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 25 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, in the case where the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), and (02H), so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, S163 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is started. Further, when the main CPU 61 is in the big hit game state, the control state flags are set in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H) to determine the processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot game state will be executed. When the end condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied, the processes of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 25 are executed at a predetermined timing by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. Then, the jackpot game state will end.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 26, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). The process is transferred to S175.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability change game state, that is, when the game state is the probability change game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the jackpot game state is set. The probability of transition is higher than that of the probabilistic gaming state as the special gaming state, as compared to the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state.

The special gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probable / non-short-time gaming state. It also includes the case where the game is in a short-time game state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33.

In this way, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win, and determining a lost symbol when the result is a loss. The details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process.
In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a different variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S179, the result of the jackpot determination in the process of S178, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select a decision table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state have different fluctuation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 27, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S198.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the main CPU 61, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, that is, the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 is based on the hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter (hit symbol determination random number counter) and the jackpot determination table, and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (No. 8 in FIG. 8). 1 The process of determining the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 and the symbol corresponding to any of the time reduction 1 to the time reduction 5 shown in the special symbol jackpot symbol distribution is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 is based on the hit symbol determination random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter (hit symbol determination random number counter) and the jackpot determination table, and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (No. 8 in FIG. 8). 2 The process of determining the symbol corresponding to the probability variation 1 shown in the special symbol jackpot symbol distribution is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 has data related to the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened, that is, probability variation 1 to probability variation 6 and time reduction 1 to time reduction according to the first special symbol. 5 or the process of setting the data corresponding to the probability variation 1 by the second special symbol in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode.
When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 28, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command.
In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 29, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit.
When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command.
In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time-saving end command indicating the end of the time-saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation count) in the probability variation game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability change end command.
In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is when the jackpot symbols are "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 4" and "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 3". Is 10000 ms, and is 50,000 ms in the case of other jackpot symbols, and the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3000 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 1”.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit game state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 30, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and transfers the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in S244. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 27.222s, which is the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening count counter, for example, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. Become. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening.
When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first large winning opening 36, the processing is transferred to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as a predetermined value.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is 16 times (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S282. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or more than the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to the interval pattern a or b is set based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 11). The interval display time between rounds may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S283. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 20000 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", and "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 1" to ". When the time reduction is 5 ", it is 10000 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 20000 ms when the jackpot symbol is" probability variation 1 "and the jackpot in the non-probability variation gaming state is 20000 ms. If it is a big hit in the game state, it is 5000 ms. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hit end interval display time at the end of the so-called first hit (the first big hit that triggers the transition from the non-probable changing gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state) is per consecutive villa (probable changing gaming state). The hit end interval display time at the end of the jackpot), which means that the probabilistic game state will continue, is set to be longer.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S284.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S297.

In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "02H". The game state flag "02H" indicates a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "180" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "00H" to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H". The game state flag "01H" indicates a non-probability variation game state and a time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "4" or "100" as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S299. When "4" is set as the number of time reductions, it means that the jackpot symbol has changed from "time reduction 2" to "time reduction 4" in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state in other situations. When shifting to, "100" is set as the number of time reductions.

In S299, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command that includes information indicating the type of the finished hit game state, in addition to the information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the remaining number of times as the number of time reductions. The remaining number of time reductions is also referred to as the remaining time reduction number as will be described later, and means the time reduction number of "4" or "100" set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) does not mean the number of time reductions remaining at any time in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the number of time reductions remaining at the start of the time reduction mode. The game state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process is transferred to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol game end processing according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 executes processing for outputting one game end signal and a jackpot signal from the external terminal plate 80 to the hall computer 100.

In S302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 to 51. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the sub CPU 71.
This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311.

In S311 the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (a random number counter value for determining an effect, a random number counter value for determining a stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 36, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 38 and 39. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S320 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding / subtracting) the value of the timer set for the effect control. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of an operation of the pressing operation button 9A.
That is, when a predetermined effect is performed, if the predetermined effect changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the effect content is changed based on the determination result in this process. Will be controlled.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
38 and 39 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

As described above, the effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designation command or based on the received start winning command. In addition, each information included in these commands may be integrated.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). )) When the same decorative symbols (numbers) are aligned, the game shifts to the jackpot game state. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss are different from these, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed (reach) with the same decorative symbol (number), and the rest (for example, 1). Those with different decorative patterns (numbers) that are stopped and displayed are called reach loss eyes. However, even if it is a loose eye, even if a specific loose eye suggesting a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning 753) is stopped and displayed, the game may shift to the jackpot game state. ..

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S399. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S401.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit start effect processing. The hit start effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes the prize ball counter addition process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is in a big hit gaming state (or when it is in a consecutive villa) according to the number of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening (1st big winning opening 36 and 2nd big winning opening 37). Counts the number of prize balls in all the jackpot game states that have been transferred to the villa, and displays the counted number of prize balls. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data indicating that the player has won a V prize in the jackpot game state, that is, shifts to the ST mode after the end of the jackpot game state. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes the inter-round effect processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting effect data according to the interval display time between rounds, for example. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated. In the hit effect pattern determination process described later with reference to FIG. 49, a live bonus is determined as the hit effect pattern, and when this live bonus is executed, the execution of the live bonus is prioritized and the interval display between rounds is displayed. It is configured so that the production data according to the time is not set.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S409. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the process shifts to S410 in FIG. 39.

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining possible winning numbers and the opening time of the large winning opening in the round. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S409 of FIG. 39, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode change process. In this process, if the received game state command is a command indicating the probability change / time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 is a command indicating the non-probability change / time saving game state by setting the value of the effect mode flag to "03H". Yes, if the remaining number of time reductions is 100, it is a command that sets "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag to indicate the non-probability change / time reduction game state, and if the remaining number of time reductions is 4 times. , "01H" is set in the value of the effect mode flag, and if it is a command indicating other, "00H" is set in the value of the effect mode flag. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes the time saving mode end processing. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easier to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode. Do. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability change end command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes the ST mode termination process. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 sets a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easier to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the ST mode. Do. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes the discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second special winning opening 37. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Production pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as an effect content, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 40, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the short mode of "01H", a value corresponding to the long mode of "02H", and a value corresponding to the ST mode. It becomes "03H". The background image and the effect content are different depending on the value of the effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process is transferred to S431. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the process is transferred to S432.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes the process during the ST mode. The processing during the ST mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item pre-reading effect in progress flag indicating that the item pre-reading effect is being executed is ON. If it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is ON, the process is transferred to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item pre-reading effect in-progress flag is not ON, the process is transferred to S434.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 executes the item look-ahead effect processing. This item look-ahead effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S435. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S436.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the long mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for long mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S437. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H" (when the value of the effect mode flag is "00H"), the process is transferred to S438.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the short mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for short mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S438, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the normal mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub-effect content determination table (for normal mode) shown in part in FIG. 12, the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the sub-effect. A process of determining an effect pattern is performed based on a random number range for selection (lottery value) and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S439.

In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determined effect pattern is an item look-ahead effect in any of the processes S435, S437, and S438 shown in FIG. 40. When it is determined that the determined effect pattern is the item look-ahead effect, the process is transferred to S440. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determined effect pattern is not the item look-ahead effect, the process is transferred to S441.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) the item pre-reading effecting flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting the effect data according to the type of the determined effect pattern. When this process is completed, the effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the item look-ahead effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the winning effect determination process of S115 of the first start port switch check process shown in FIG. 21 or S125 of the second start port switch check process shown in FIG. 22, "look-ahead effect" is performed by the main CPU 61. When is determined, the item look-ahead effect may be executed. That is, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect may be controlled on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, the variation pattern specification command may include information on whether or not the "look-ahead effect" is possible by the main CPU 61, or the sub CPU 71 may include information on whether or not the "look-ahead effect" included in the received start winning command is possible. The information may be retained and the effect pattern may be determined with reference to the retained information.

Further, the effect content of the item look-ahead effect (for example, the number of plates A to D and the expectation degree of each expectation degree type) may be determined on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, a variation pattern may be determined for each effect content of the item look-ahead effect, and the sub CPU 71 may perform the item look-ahead effect based on the content of the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined variation pattern. When the variation pattern of is selected, the effect content of the item look-ahead effect is separately determined, and the variation pattern specification command including the information of the determined effect content is transmitted, so that the sub CPU 71 performs the item look-ahead effect. It may be that. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect, and at the same time, determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect, whether or not the main CPU 61 executes the item look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect, and determines the effect content of the item look-ahead effect. Aspects are also included.

Further, regardless of whether the decision-making body is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect when executing the item look-ahead effect are different lottery. It may be decided by, or it may be decided at the same time by a batch lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the item look-ahead effect and the effect content of the item look-ahead effect when executing the item look-ahead effect may be determined by a plurality of processes, or may be determined by one process. ..

[Processing during ST mode]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the processing in ST mode executed by the sub CPU 71. This process in ST mode is a process for determining an effect pattern as an effect content in ST mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 41, in S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “51”. The ST management counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "51", the process is transferred to S451. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "51", the process is transferred to S452.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) a battle effect control flag during ST indicating that the battle reach section is in the ST mode in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S452.

In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the battle effect control flag during ST is ON (ON). If it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is ON, the process is transferred to S453. On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is not ON (ON), the process is transferred to S454.

In S453, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for ST battle production (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in ST mode is terminated.

In S454, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is "0". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game (first game) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "0", the process is transferred to S455. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "0", the process is transferred to S457.

In S455, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story introduction effect pattern according to the value of the ST middle villa counter. The ST middle consecutive villa counter is a counter that indicates the number of consecutive villas in the big hit gaming state (for example, during the second special symbol hit) in the ST mode, except for the so-called first hit. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode proceed according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas in the ST mode (value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter). Further, the story introduction effect pattern is an effect pattern for setting the effect data for executing the effect (for example, title display) at the time of introduction of the series of stories at the beginning of the series of story effects. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S456.

In S456, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the number of sets. As for the number of sets, in the story section of ST mode, the number of games is set to 5 times as one set, and a series of story productions are executed over a total of 10 sets, and how many sets of story productions are currently executed? It is the data which shows. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S462.

In S457, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is "1". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the second special symbol game (second game) in the ST mode and is the first special symbol game in which the first set of story production is started. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "1", the process is transferred to S460. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "1", the process is transferred to S458.

In S458, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is "5 x number of sets (however," 9 "or less) + 1". That is, in the sub CPU 71, the values of the management counter during ST are "5 x 1 + 1 = 6" (start of the second set), "5 x 2 + 1 = 11" (start of the third set), and "5 x 3 + 1 = 16". (Start of 4th set), "5x4 + 1 = 21" (Start of 5th set), "5x5 + 1 = 26" (Start of 6th set), "5x6 + 1 = 31" (7th set) (Start), "5 x 7 + 1 = 36" (start of 8th set), "5 x 8 + 1 = 41" (start of 9th set), "5 x 9 + 1 = 46" (start of 10th set) Judge whether or not. If it is determined that the values of the management counter during ST are these values, the process is transferred to S459. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not these values, the process is transferred to S461.

In S459, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process for the number of sets that adds one to the number of sets. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S460.

In S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story production pattern according to the number of sets (“1” to “9”) and the value of the ST middle villa counter. By performing the processing in this way, a series of story productions proceed in the story section of the ST mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S461.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation causes a big hit. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation finally stops and displays the jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the fluctuation is a big hit, the process is transferred to S463. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in a big hit, the process is transferred to S462.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST management counter that adds 1 to the value of the ST management counter. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in ST mode is terminated.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 executes the story effect pattern change process during ST. The process of changing the story effect pattern during ST will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in ST mode is terminated.

[Story production pattern change processing during ST]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a story effect pattern change process during ST executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST story effect pattern change process is a process for changing the effect pattern as the effect content when a big hit occurs in the story section of the ST mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 42, in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining production time of the basic production time for one set from the value of the management counter during ST. Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination in the story section of the ST mode (ST game state) is lost is basically set to 2 s (2000 ms). ing. That is, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the first fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation time (2s) is determined with high probability. .. Further, the basic production time for one set (five special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode is set to be 10 s (10000 ms). That is, the story production corresponding to the value of the number of sets is advanced with the time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time (2s) by the predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) as the basic production time (10s). ..

The sub CPU 71 is 10s (10s-0s) when the value of the ST management counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the ST management counter values are "1" and "6"). Is calculated as the remaining production time, and when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are “2” and “7”), 8s (10s-2s) is the remaining production time. When it indicates the third game in one set (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "3" and "8"), 6s (10s-4s) is calculated as the remaining production time. When the fourth game in one set (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "4" and "9") is shown, 4s (10s-6s) is calculated as the remaining production time, and 5 in one set. When the game item (for example, the values of the management counters during ST are "5" and "10") is indicated, 2s (10s-8s) is calculated as the remaining production time. That is, the sub CPU 71 calculates the remaining production time with respect to the basic production time according to the number of remaining games in one set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S471.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining production time of the basic production time for one set from the value of the management counter during ST, but the processing is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 71 is included in one set. An in-set counter that counts the number of games (or the number of effects) may be provided, and a process of calculating (selecting) the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set may be performed from the value of the in-set counter. For example, when the value of the in-set counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is "1"), the sub CPU 71 calculates (selects) 10 s as the remaining production time. However, when the second game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is "2") is indicated, 8s is calculated (selected) as the remaining production time, and the third game in one set (for example, "2") is shown. When the value of the in-set counter indicates "3"), 6s is calculated (selected) as the remaining production time, and the fourth game in one set (for example, the in-set counter value is "4") is calculated. When it is shown, 4s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and when it indicates the fifth game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is "5"), 2s is the remaining effect. It may be calculated (selected) as time.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is the same as the fluctuation time determined in the fluctuation. For example, if the remaining production time is 6s (6000ms) and the fluctuation time is also 6s (6000ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same. If it is determined that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same, the process is transferred to S472. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are not the same, the process is transferred to S473.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set. The jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set is effect data for notifying the transition to the jackpot game state in synchronization with the end of the currently executing set in the story section of the ST mode. In this way, when the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same, the story production in the set is executed normally until the end of the currently running set, and a big hit is obtained at the end of the currently running set. Will be announced. In addition, without setting the effect data for big hit notification at the end of the set (that is, without notifying that it was a big hit by a dedicated effect), it was a big hit depending on the combination of decorative symbols at the end of the set. May be announced. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is longer than the fluctuation time determined in the fluctuation. For example, if the remaining production time is 8s (8000ms) and the fluctuation time is 6s (6000ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time. If it is determined that the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time, the process is transferred to S474. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining production time is not longer than the fluctuation time (the remaining production time is shorter than the fluctuation time), the process is transferred to S475.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of advancing the story production pattern determined so that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are the same. For example, when the remaining production time is 8s (8000ms) and the fluctuation time is 6s (6000ms), 8s (8000ms) when the story production in the set is normally executed until the currently executing set is completed. ) Although it is necessary, the sub CPU 71 advances the story production in the set so that the story production in the remaining set ends in 6s (6000ms), and the end of the remaining production time and the end of the variable time are reached. Control to synchronize. After advancing the story production in the set, the production data for big hit notification at the end of the set is set in the same manner as the processing of S472, and the big hit is announced at the end of the currently executing set. It may be done, or different production data may be set. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpot has been achieved by the combination mode of the decorative symbols at the end of the set without notifying that the jackpot has been achieved. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the effectable time by subtracting the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 from the fluctuation time. That is, when the remaining production time is shorter than the fluctuation time, the sub CPU 71 is a predetermined set after the currently executing set, and becomes a big hit at the end of the set, and the story production ends. In the effect end target set, the effectable time for synchronizing the end of the effect end target set and the end of the variable time is calculated. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S476.

In S476, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effectable time calculated in the process of S475 is longer than the basic effect time (10 s (10000 ms)). For example, if the remaining production time is 4s (4000ms) and the fluctuation time is 30s (30000ms), the production possible time is calculated to be 26s (26000ms). In this case, the sub CPU 71 has the production possible time (26s). ) Is longer than the basic production time (10s). If it is determined that the production possible time is longer than the basic production time, the process is transferred to S477. On the other hand, if it is determined that the production possible time is not longer than the basic production time (the production possible time is shorter than the basic production time), the process is transferred to S478.

In S477, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect data during ST that suggests a big hit in the effect end target set. In the present embodiment, when the effectable time is longer than the basic effect time, the effect end target set is the set after the next set of the currently executing set. In this case, as a so-called premier production, a jackpot suggestion production (special production mode) based on the special production data during ST is executed. It should be noted that the processing of S477 may be performed without performing the processing of S476. That is, even when the effect end target set is the next set of the set currently being executed, the jackpot suggestion effect (special effect mode) based on the special effect data during ST may be executed.
Specific screen display examples (effect examples) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 68.

In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the story production pattern of the set following the determined story production pattern so that the production possible time and the time until the production end of the production end target set are the same. For example, when the production possible time is 6s (6000ms), the next set of the currently executing set becomes the production end target set, so that the sub CPU 71 can perform the story production in the next set, which is the production end target set. By determining the story production pattern that will end in 6s (6000ms), control is performed so that the end of the production possible time and the production end of the production end target set are synchronized. After executing the story production in the production end target set, the production data for big hit notification at the end of the set is set in the same manner as the processing of S472, and the big hit is announced at the end of the production end target set. It may be done, or different production data may be set. Further, it may be possible to announce that the jackpot has been achieved by the combination of the decorative symbols at the end of the set for which the production ends, without notifying that the jackpot has been achieved. When this process is completed, the story effect pattern change processing routine during ST is terminated.

[Item look-ahead effect processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an item look-ahead effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item pre-reading effect processing is a process when the item pre-reading effect is determined as the effect pattern in the normal mode or the time saving mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 43, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation has started. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation this time is a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command for which the item look-ahead effect is determined. If it is determined that the fluctuation has started, the process is transferred to S481. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation does not occur, the process is transferred to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 executes an item use effect process for basically executing an effect for using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the fluctuation. This item use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. When this process is completed, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not any one of the plates A, B, C, and D corresponding to the determined item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 12 and 13) is one or more. To do. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S483. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation. If it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is not a shortened variation, the process is transferred to S484.

In S484, the sub CPU 71 executes an item acquisition effect process for determining whether or not to allow the player to acquire a plate as an item in advance before the change. This item acquisition effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. When this process is completed, the item look-ahead effect processing routine is terminated.

In this way, in the item look-ahead effect, an item (for example, a plate) may be acquired before the change, or all items (for example, a plate) may be acquired in the change, but before the change. When a shortened fluctuation with a relatively shorter fluctuation time (for example, a shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2000 ms) than a normal fluctuation (for example, a normal fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 4000 ms) is determined as a special symbol fluctuation pattern. , The item acquisition effect processing is not performed, and the item (for example, a plate) is not acquired in advance (that is, the advance notification effect in the item acquisition effect process described later is not performed). With this configuration, even when the item look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the effect from being out of balance due to the relationship with the fluctuation time (particularly, shortened fluctuation). In the predetermined symbol fluctuation before the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation was determined as the special symbol fluctuation pattern, but the fluctuation is shortened according to the number of holdings (for example, according to the number of holdings being 3 or more). Even if it is changed, in the process of S482, it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the item acquisition effect process is not performed.

[Item usage effect processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an item use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item use effect process is a process for basically executing an effect using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the fluctuation, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 44, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 has not acquired all the plates by the item acquisition effect processing described later, and the plate A, the plate B, and the plate C corresponding to the determined item look-ahead effect (see FIGS. 12 and 13). , And whether or not any one of the plates D is one or more. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S491. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the process is transferred to S492.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate acquisition effect data for acquiring all the remaining plates. For example, "item look-ahead effect 15" (see FIGS. 12 and 13) has been determined, and the remaining plates include one plate A, one plate B, one plate C, and one plate D. In this case, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for performing the effect of sequentially acquiring the plates A to D at the start of the fluctuation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a pseudo continuous effect. Basically, the decorative symbol starts its fluctuation when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and stops its fluctuation when the special symbol stops fluctuating. By temporarily stopping and re-changing only the decorative design, it is a production that makes it appear as if the design was changed multiple times in a pseudo manner. The number of temporary stops and re-variations of this decorative symbol is the pseudo-ream number (pseudo-ream number), and the larger the pseudo-ream number, the higher the expectation that it will be a big hit. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (pseudo-ream effect data = pseudo-series number 0 times) to "item look-ahead effect". It is possible to determine any of "15" (pseudo-ream production data = pseudo-ream number 4 times). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different pseudo-ream numbers (0 to 4 times). However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when the number of pseudo stations is 0, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates A is 1 or more is not determined. As described above, in S492, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect pattern in which the pseudo-ream number is 1 or more is determined. If it is determined that there is a pseudo continuous effect, the process is transferred to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pseudo continuous effect, the process is transferred to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process is transferred to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S495.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate A use effect processing. The plate A use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S496.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting pseudo-continuous production data predetermined by the production pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the pseudo-ream effect is performed according to the predetermined number of pseudo-reams (0 to 4 times). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S496.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a serif effect. The dialogue effect is an effect of displaying the dialogue of a predetermined character in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 while the special symbol is fluctuating, and the expectation that is a big hit is displayed differently depending on the color of the dialogue. It is a thing. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that the big hit is in the order of the dialogue (white), the dialogue (yellow), the dialogue (green), and the dialogue (red) is high. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (no dialogue effect data = no dialogue effect), "item look-ahead effect 15". It is possible to determine one of (line effect data = dialogue (white)) to "item look-ahead effect 15" (line effect data = dialogue (red)). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there is an effect pattern in which the presence / absence of the dialogue effect and the color are different. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when there is no dialogue effect, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates B is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern with a serif effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a dialogue effect, the process is transferred to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no dialogue effect, the process is transferred to S500.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process is transferred to S498. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S499.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate B use effect processing. The plate B use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S500.

In S499, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the dialogue effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the serif effect is performed according to the predetermined color of the serif effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S500.

In S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a cut-in effect. The cut-in effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is cut in and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 while the special symbol is fluctuating. It is intended to be displayed. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that the big hit is in the order of cut-in (white), cut-in (yellow), cut-in (green), and cut-in (red) is high. For example, when the determined effect pattern is "item look-ahead effect 15", more specifically, "item look-ahead effect 15" (no cut-in effect data = no cut-in effect), "item look-ahead effect". It is possible to determine one of "15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (white)) to "item look-ahead effect 15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (red)). That is, even if the "item look-ahead effect 15" is the same in terms of the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns with different cut-in effects and different colors. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when there is no cut-in effect, the effect pattern of the item look-ahead effect in which the number of plates C is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern with a cut-in effect is determined. If it is determined that there is a cut-in effect, the process is transferred to S501. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no cut-in effect, the process is transferred to S504.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process is transferred to S502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S503.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate C use effect processing. The plate C use effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S504.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the cut-in effect is performed according to the predetermined color of the cut-in effect. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S506.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes the plate D use effect processing. Since the plate D is configured to have a higher probability of being acquired when the result of the jackpot determination (winning) is a hit than when it is a loss (see FIGS. 12 and 13), the plate D is configured. It means that there is a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit just by acquiring it. In this process, when the result of the jackpot determination (winning) is a hit and the jackpot symbols are "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", the sub CPU 71 determines the hit effect pattern described later using FIG. 49. When the plate D is carried over so that the plate D is used in the treatment, the treatment of carrying over the plate D can be performed. In other cases, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect change data. The special effect change data directly or indirectly applies the plate D to the effect data set in the processing of S494 (FIG. 45), S495, S498 (FIG. 46), S499, S502 (FIG. 47), or S503. It is the data to change the effect to be performed so that the expectation is higher. For example, even when it is determined that there is a cut-in effect and it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern is converted to S502 (FIG. Change in the same manner as in the process of 47). At that time, the effect of directly using the plate D may be performed, or the effect of converting the plate D into the plate C and using the plate D may be performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S506.

The mode of changing the effect based on the special effect change data is not limited to the above-mentioned mode. As an example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the effect is changed so that a big hit is notified by a variable display mode and a stop display mode different from the variable display mode and the stop display mode of the usual decorative symbol. For example, in a predetermined effect mode (including the effect mode in the variation of the item look-ahead effect), first, the reach state is reached, and the effect is generated (developed) before the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, and the super reach state is generated. After that, if it is a big hit, the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if it is not a big hit, it is configured to stop and display with a reach loss. In the case of a big hit in the fluctuation, the predetermined effect is originally determined based on the fact that the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired). In the aspect, where the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the reach loss eye, and then the effect of starting the pseudo normal fluctuation of the next game is performed. , The effect using the plate D may be performed, and the effect may be changed so that the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. Furthermore, as another example, when there are a plurality of super reach states having different expectations, the expectation is higher based on the fact that the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired). The production may be changed so as to generate a high super reach state.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing each acquired number of plates. Further, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (OFF) the item pre-reading effect flag. When this process is completed, the item use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Plate A use effect processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a plate A use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate A use effect processing is a process for causing the acquired plate A to act to execute a pseudo-continuous effect in the fluctuation, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 45, in S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of acquired plates A. For example, if the number of pseudo stations is 3 and the number of plates A acquired is 2, the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired. If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is larger than the number of plates A acquired, the process is transferred to S511. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is not greater than the number of plates A acquired (the number of pseudo stations is less than or equal to the number of plates A acquired), the process is transferred to S512.

In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of the pseudo continuous temporary stop will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S513.

In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of the normal temporary stop, the effect data of using the plate A, and the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of normal temporary stop and the use of plate A will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S513.

In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs a pseudo-ream number update process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo-ream number. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S514.

In S514, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo-ream number is "0". If it is determined that the pseudo-ream number is "0", the plate A use effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo-ream number is not "0", the process is transferred to S510.

[Plate B use effect processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a plate B use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate B use effect processing is a process for executing the acquired plate B to execute the dialogue effect in the fluctuation, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 46, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting dialogue effect data having a lower expectation than the predetermined dialogue effect data according to the number of plates B. For example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined dialogue effect data is dialogue (red) and the number of plates B is one, the dialogue production data with low expectation for one plate B is dialogue (green). Temporarily set. Further, for example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined dialogue effect data is dialogue (red) and the number of plates B is two, the dialogue production data with low expectation for two plates B (red). Temporarily set (yellow). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S521.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the temporarily set low-expected serif effect data, the effect data using the plate B, and the original line effect data.
By setting these effect data, when the number of plates B is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the dialogue (green) dialogue effect data is first executed, and then the plate B is executed. It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data using one sheet is executed to increase the expectation of the dialogue effect, and finally the effect corresponding to the dialogue (red) dialogue effect data is executed. Further, in the above example, when the number of plates B is two, the effect corresponding to the dialogue effect data of the dialogue (yellow) is executed first, and then the effect data corresponding to the effect data using two plates B is supported. It is notified that the effect to be performed is executed and the expectation of the dialogue effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the dialogue effect data of the dialogue (red) is executed. That is, it is possible to produce an effect as if the expectation level of the dialogue effect was improved by the action of the plate B. When this process is completed, the plate B use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Plate C use effect processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a plate C use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate C use effect processing is a process for executing the cut-in effect in the fluctuation by causing the acquired plate C to act, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 47, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting cut-in effect data having a lower expectation than the predetermined cut-in effect data according to the number of plates C. For example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is one, the cut-in effect data with a low expectation for one plate C is cut. Temporarily set the in (green).
Further, for example, in the sub CPU 71, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is two, the cut-in effect data with a low expectation for two plates C is used. Temporarily set a certain cut-in (yellow). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S531.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the temporarily set cut-in effect data with low expectation, the effect data using the plate C, and the original cut-in effect data. By setting these effect data, when the number of plates C is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the cut-in (green) cut-in effect data is first executed, and then the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data is executed. It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data using one plate C is executed and the expectation of the cut-in effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. To. In the above example, when the number of plates C is two, the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of the cut-in (yellow) is executed first, and then the effect data corresponding to the effect data using two plates C is supported. It is notified that the effect to be performed is executed and the expectation of the cut-in effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of the cut-in (red) is executed. That is, it is possible to produce an effect as if the expectation of the cut-in effect was improved by the action of the plate C. When this process is completed, the plate C use effect processing routine is terminated.

[Item acquisition production process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an item acquisition effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item acquisition effect processing is a process for executing an effect of causing the player to acquire a plate as an item before the change, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 48, in S540, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process is transferred to S541. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S544.

In S541, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate A display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S542.

In S542, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate A display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S543. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S544.

In S543, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates A by subtracting 1 from the number of plates A. When there are a plurality of plates A, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate A display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates A. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates A will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S544.

In S544, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process is transferred to S545. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S548.

In S545, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate B display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S546.

In S546, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate B display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S548.

In S547, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates B by subtracting 1 from the number of plates B. When there are a plurality of plates B, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate B display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates B. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates B is subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S548.

In S548, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process is transferred to S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S552.

In S549, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate C display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate C has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S550.

In S550, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate C display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S552.

In S551, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates C by subtracting 1 from the number of plates C. When there are a plurality of plates C, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate C display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display the plurality of plates C. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates C will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S552.

In S552, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process is transferred to S556.

In S553, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate D display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate D has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S554.

In S554, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate D display lottery has been won, the process is transferred to S555. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D display lottery has not been won, the process is transferred to S556.

In S555, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates D by subtracting 1 from the number of plates D. When there are a plurality of plates D, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-mentioned plate D display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates D. May be. In the latter case, the number of plates D will be subtracted in this process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S556.

In S556, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate display effect data according to the plate that has won the display lottery (S541, S545, S549, S553).
Based on the plate display effect data, the number of target plates won in each of the above display lottery is displayed as an effect image in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the item acquisition effect processing routine is terminated.

Here, as an example of the case where the plate (item) is acquired by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 49, it is determined that the item use effect process shown in FIG. 44 is executed in the special symbol game after three games. In this case (when the special symbol game after 3 games is the variation), the case where one plate A to D is acquired will be described as an example.

In the special symbol game of the first game (two games before the fluctuation), for example, when the plate A display lottery and the plate D display lottery are won, an effect image showing that one plate A has been acquired, and an effect image showing that one plate A has been acquired, and An effect image indicating that one plate D has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Next, in the special symbol game of the second game (one game before the fluctuation), for example, when the plate B display lottery is won, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that one plate B has been acquired. Is displayed in the display area 4A of. Then, in the special symbol game of the third game (the variation), one plate C is acquired for the remaining plate C which is not shown to be acquired by the item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 49. Is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see S491 in FIG. 44), and the item look-ahead effect using these plates (items) is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, before the fluctuation is started, the advance notification effect (for example, plates A to D) for notifying the type of the item (for example, plates A to D) in the item look-ahead effect is acquired. It is configured to determine whether or not to perform an effect image indicating that the person is present. With this configuration, when giving a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific game state), it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (effect based on the start memory before the variable execution). ..

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a hit effect pattern, which is an effect pattern during the big hit game state, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 49, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12. Here, the hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 12 (see FIG. 8), and the hit effect pattern flags "01H" to "0CH" are set corresponding to each of the hit patterns 1 to 12. Will be done. The hit effect pattern flag may be set according to the information of the big hit symbol included in the received symbol designation command, and may be set according to the same information included in the received hit start display command. May be. That is, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of jackpot to be started is the hit pattern 12 (the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol). When it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12, the process is transferred to S561. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate the hit pattern 12, the process is transferred to S566.

In S561, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST mode is in progress. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag described above is "03H". If it is determined that the ST mode is in progress, the process is transferred to S563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST mode is not in progress, the process is transferred to S562.

In S562, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the promotion hit effect pattern for SP bonus. If the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12 and the ST mode is not in progress, it is basically the case that the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode. , It is decided to determine the promotion hit production pattern for SP bonus, which indicates in the SP bonus that the mode is changed (promoted) from the time saving mode to the ST mode via the SP bonus during the second special symbol hit. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is "50" or less. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the story section in the ST mode has become a big hit (whether the big hit has been a consecutive villa). If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is "50" or less, the process is transferred to S564. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not "50" or less, the process is transferred to S565.

In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the effect pattern per story related to the SP bonus according to the value of the ST consecutive villa counter and the value of the ST middle management counter. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode proceed according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas in the ST mode (value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter). The series of story productions that are being performed will be inherited even when shifting from the story section in ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol.
Therefore, per SP bonus related story according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas in ST mode (value of ST middle consecutive villa counter) and the progress of the story in the story section of ST mode (value of ST middle management counter). The production pattern will be decided. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect pattern per story related to the SP bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S565, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an effect pattern per battle for SP bonus. The battle hit effect pattern for SP bonus is a hit effect pattern determined when a big hit occurs in the battle reach section of ST mode, and one character (for example, a ally character) in the battle reach section of ST mode and others. This is a hit effect pattern for executing an effect related to a battle scene of a character (for example, an enemy character) in an SP bonus. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In S566, the sub CPU 71 refers to the hit effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 14), and performs a process of determining the hit effect pattern according to the type of the hit pattern indicated by the hit effect pattern flag. As described above, when the hit effect pattern is determined according to the type of the more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46), the hit effect pattern flag should be specified in more detail. The hit effect pattern may be determined according to the hit effect pattern flag and other information indicating a more detailed hit pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S567.

In S567, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. More specifically, in the plate D use effect process of S505 of the item use effect process shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the number of plates D carried over is 1 or more. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process is transferred to S568. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the hit effect pattern determination processing routine is terminated.

In S568, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the hit effect pattern so as to be a promotion (reverse) pattern according to the type of the determined hit pattern. For example, if a live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is determined as a winning production pattern and plate D is acquired, a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is temporarily set as a production pattern. , The process of setting the effect data corresponding to the temporarily set live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), the effect data using the plate D, and the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is performed. By setting these effect data, in the live bonus, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is first executed, and then in the first branch section described later, the effect is executed. It is notified that the production corresponding to the production data using the plate D is executed and the live bonus is promoted (reversed), and then the production corresponding to the production data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is executed. Change the hit effect pattern so that. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

[Hit start production process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is a process for starting the effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 50, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 14) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to start the live bonus during the first special symbol hit.
When it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S571. On the other hand, when it is determined that the music pattern has not been determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S572.

In S571, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the validity period timer according to the start time of the initial section described later in the determined music pattern. That is, when the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 controls to start the effect by the music pattern from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 4000 ms is set as the validity period timer. An example of the production of the music pattern and an example of the screen display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52, 53, 55 and 56. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the validity period timer according to the time corresponding to the hit start interval time. That is, when the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 controls to start the effect by the hit effect pattern so as to synchronize with the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 10000 ms is set as the validity period timer. When this process is completed, the hit start effect processing routine is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for ending the effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 51, in S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change. That is, in the sub CPU 71, the type of jackpot to end is hit pattern 1 to 6 (big hit symbol "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol) or hit pattern 12 (big hit symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol). ") Is determined. If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change, the process is transferred to S581. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate a probability change, the process is transferred to S585.

In S581, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot has been a big hit in the ST mode (whether the jackpot has been consecutively villaged). If it is determined that the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" or more, the process is transferred to S582. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST Churenso counter is not "1" or more ("0"), the process is transferred to S583.

In S582, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST middle villa counter that adds 1 to the value of the ST middle villa counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S584.

In S583, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the ST middle villa counter. As a result, the first series of story production is performed in the story section of the ST mode after the end of the so-called first hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S584.

In the present embodiment, the number of consecutive villas excluding the so-called first hit is counted using the ST middle consecutive villa counter, but the number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be counted separately. .. In this case, a villa counter that counts the number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be provided separately, and from the value of the ST middle villa counter (for example, 1 is added to the value of the ST middle villa counter). , The number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be counted. By counting the number of consecutive villas including the first hit in this way, the count result may be displayed separately from the series of story productions. For example, when the above-mentioned first series of story productions are performed, by displaying "2 consecutive big hits" as the display of the number of consecutive villas including the first hit, the game is played regardless of the production content. It is possible to make a person roughly grasp the number of game media acquired.

In S584, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the initial value of the management counter during ST. As a result, the number of games in the story section of the so-called ST mode is managed from the beginning. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S585.

In S585, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 14) is determined as a hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the end of the live bonus during the first special symbol hit. When it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern has not been determined as the hit effect pattern, the process is transferred to S586.

In S586, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data at the end of the bonus according to the type of the hit effect pattern. Here, when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern, if the effect corresponding to the music pattern started in the hit start effect process (see FIG. 50) is not completed, the effect is preferentially executed. The production data at the end of the bonus is not set. That is, the effect according to the music pattern is not overwritten by the effect at the end of the bonus. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

Although not shown, in this hit end effect process, the sub CPU 71 operates the return button 24 to return the card (for example, the prepaid card) from the card unit 84 at the end of the so-called first hit. The process of setting the card forgotten notification effect data for executing the card forgotten notification for prompting the player is performed. This card forgetting notification may be executed together with the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus, and at the end of the so-called first hit, it is executed instead of the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus. You may do it. Further, even when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern and the effect by this music pattern is not completed at the end of the so-called first hit, the card removal forgetting notification may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 71, various effects in the present embodiment will be described with reference to an effect example and a screen display example.

[Example of live bonus production]
51 and 52 are diagrams showing an example of live bonus production. In addition, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, an production example in the case of the music pattern A is shown as an example of the live bonus.

The upper part of FIG. 52 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 and the live bonus music pattern A (success) is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A continues with the initial section (6s) in which the intro part of the music pattern A is output, the first section (22s) in which the verse part of the music pattern A is output, and the music pattern A. The first branch section (7s) that first indicates whether or not the music pattern A, the second section (22s) in which the B melody portion of the music pattern A is output, and the second section that indicates whether or not the music pattern A continues are shown below. It is composed of a branch section (9s) and a third section (25s) in which the chorus portion in the music pattern A is output and it is suggested that the specific second round game is executed.
The output time shown in parentheses in each section (including the fourth section and the fifth section described later) is an example, and the average digestion time for each round (for each long opening or short opening) and the interval between rounds. It is assumed that the time corresponding to the interval and the tune of the music corresponding to the music pattern can be comprehensively set as appropriate.

In the music pattern A (success), the intro part, which is the initial common part of the predetermined music, is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then the predetermined music is synchronized with the start of the jackpot gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round. Next, the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 4th R, and then, in the specific branch period (second branch section) starting from the beginning of the 7th R, the predetermined Whether or not the output of the music of the music is continued is indicated, and then the chorus portion, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 8th R.

The lower part of FIG. 52 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) includes the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), the above-mentioned second section (22s), and the above-mentioned second section (22s). It is composed of a second branch section (9s) and a fourth section (13s) suggesting that the chorus portion in the music pattern A is not output and the specific second round game is not executed.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game state, and then the jackpot game state. The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined song, is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round, the predetermined song Whether or not the output continues is indicated, then the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined song, is output from the middle of the 4th R, and then a specific branch starting from the beginning of the 7th R. In the period (second branch section), it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined song is continued, and then the chorus part, which is a specific part of the predetermined song, is not output from the middle of the 8th R, and the specific second It is shown that the round game is not performed.

The upper part of FIG. 53 shows an effect example in which the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3 and the live bonus music pattern A (reverse) is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (reversal), the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and a predetermined sound are output to perform a specific second round game. It consists of a fifth section (13s) that is suggested to be executed. The predetermined sound output in the fifth section may be a chorus portion in the music pattern A (that is, the third section and the fifth section may be the same), and other sounds in the music pattern A may be the same. It may be a part (for example, a C melody part), or it may be a specific sound effect related to a predetermined music indicating that it has been reversed (a specific second round game is executed). Further, after the specific sound effect is output, a rust portion or a part of another portion may be output.

In the music pattern A (reversal), the intro part, which is the initial common part of the predetermined music, is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then the predetermined music is synchronized with the start of the jackpot gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round. Next, a predetermined sound, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle of the 4th R.

The lower part of FIG. 52 shows an example of the effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) is composed of the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and the above-mentioned fourth section (13s). There is.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game state, and then the jackpot game state. The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined music, is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3rd round, the predetermined music It is shown whether or not the output is continued, and then it is shown that the predetermined sound, which is a specific part of the predetermined music, is not output from the middle of the 4th round, and the specific second round game is not executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined music is in the jackpot game state of the hit pattern 3 in which the specific second round game is executed and in the jackpot game state of the hit pattern 8 in which the specific second round game is not executed. The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the elapse of the predetermined branch period is performed. Output. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the jackpot game state (specific game state).

Further, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, 1R where the initial section is started) when the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started is started. By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the eyes), it is not necessary to monitor the round game, so that the control load is increased. It can be prevented from doing so.

Further, in the present embodiment, in any of the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 3, the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 8, the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 1, and the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 7, a predetermined music (for example, The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Here, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. Is output, and in the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 1 and the jackpot gaming state of the hit pattern 7, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, the B melody of the second section) is output, and a specific branching period is output. (For example, the second branch section) is allowed to pass. Then, in the jackpot game state of the hit pattern 1, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the lapse of this specific branching period is performed. Output. With such a configuration, the player's expectation in a specific gaming state can be further increased.

The music pattern B (success) and the music pattern C (confirmed) basically have the same structure as the music pattern A (success), and the music pattern B (reversal) basically has the same structure as the music pattern A (reversal). The composition of the music pattern B (failure) is basically the same as that of the music pattern A (failure), but a part or all of the output time of each specified section is different. It may be configured so that a part of the defined sections is not provided.

Further, for example, in the first branch section and / or the second branch section, an effect of prompting the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A may be performed, based on the fact that the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times. The portion of the predetermined music corresponding to the section following the section may be output earlier than when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated a predetermined number of times.

[Example of screen display during normal operation]
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in a normal state. The normal time referred to here means a time when an effect mode such as a normal mode or a time saving mode is executed. As shown in the figure, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, a first reserved quantity information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal state. The second reserved quantity information 702 corresponding to the start storage of the symbol is displayed.

The plurality of decorative symbols 700 form, for example, three columns, and the numerical symbols "1" to "7" are displayed so as to be in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, basically, the stop display mode is set in a state where all the decorative symbols 700 are aligned with the same number symbols from the variable display mode. The stop display mode of the decorative symbol 700 other than these is basically a loss.

The first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed by the reserved marks corresponding to the reserved quantity corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Up to four hold marks indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are additionally displayed according to the winning of the game balls to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, respectively. The hold mark indicating the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 is used when the decorative symbol starts to change and display together with the special symbol based on the start memory of the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It is hidden from the right end side and erased. When the hold marks of both the first hold quantity information 701 and the second hold quantity information 702 are displayed, the start memory of the second special symbol has priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. 2. The hold mark of the hold quantity information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold quantity information 701.

Although not particularly shown, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various production modes depending on the production content. Of course, the same display image, background image, or the like may be displayed even in different production modes.

[Screen display example of music pattern A]
55 and 56 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the music pattern A. In the initial section, the first to fifth sections, the first branch section, and the second branch section described above, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is linked to the output of music from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. The production image is also displayed on. Although the effect image corresponding to the initial section is omitted in FIGS. 55 and 56, for example, it is assumed that an effect image such as a title display in which the song title is displayed according to the intro portion is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the first section of the music pattern A, the predetermined character sings the A melody portion in conjunction with the output of the A melody portion which is the first common part of the predetermined music. The effect image is displayed, and in the first branch section of the music pattern A, the effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued is displayed.

Then, when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the predetermined sound which is a specific part of the predetermined music.

Further, when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 or 7, as shown in FIG. 56, the predetermined character is linked to the output of the B melody portion which is the second common part of the predetermined music. An effect image for singing the B melody portion is displayed, and an effect image indicating whether or not the output of a predetermined music is continued is displayed in the second branch section of the music pattern A.

Then, when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the chorus portion which is a specific part of the predetermined music.

[Screen display example of story section in ST mode]
57 and 58 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the story section in the ST mode. As shown in FIG. 57, the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the story section of the ST mode, and the story corresponding to the current number of sets is displayed. The set story display area 703 (first image display means) for displaying an image (first image), and a planned set for displaying a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward. A window display area 704 (second image display means) is provided. The decorative symbol 700 may be superimposed on the set story display area 703 with a predetermined transparency and displayed in a variable manner, and may be reduced to the set story display area 703, the planned set window display area 704, or other areas. It may be changed and displayed. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 700 may not be displayed in the story section of the ST mode.

As described above, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story productions are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST Churenso counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1", the story production of "Episode 1", which is the first story production in a series of story productions, is the current story production. It is performed according to the value of the number of sets, and when the value of the ST Nakarenso counter is "2", it is the story production "Episode 2" following the "Episode 1" of the series of story productions. The story production will be performed according to the value of the current number of sets. At this time, the story images 703a and 703b corresponding to the current number of sets are displayed in the set story display area 703, and the window images 704a and 704b suggesting the story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward are the planned set window display area 704. Will be displayed in.

Further, for example, when the number of sets is updated (added by 1) to the next number of sets, the story image corresponding to the story suggested by the window image 704a (704b) is displayed in the set story display area 703. At the same time, the plurality of window images displayed in the schedule set window display area 704 slide to the left, and the update of the number of sets (that is, the progress of the story effect) is notified. In FIG. 58, the white window image, the shaded window image, and the black window image displayed in the schedule set window display area 704 are schematically assumed to indicate different window images (that is, different stories). It is a representation of the target.

[Screen display example of production pattern per related story for SP bonus]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a screen display example of an effect pattern per story related to SP bonus. In the present embodiment, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story productions are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST Churenso counter, and a big hit in the story section of the ST mode. In the case of, the production pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the series of story production is determined (see FIG. 49).

The upper part of FIG. 59 shows a screen display example of a production pattern per story related to SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" and the value of the ST middle management counter is less than "26". ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1" as a related story per story effect pattern for SP bonus related to the ST Nakarenso counter value of "1". The outline of the story of a series of story production by the story production pattern during ST is displayed. That is, in this screen display example, a summary of a story in a series of story productions is displayed as a related story production.

The lower part of FIG. 59 shows a screen display example of a production pattern per story related to SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" and the value of the ST middle management counter is "26" or more. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST Churenso counter is "1" as a related story per story effect pattern for SP bonus related to the ST Nakarenso counter value of "1". In the case of, the name scene of the story of a series of story production by the story production pattern during ST and the explanation (corresponding story) of this name scene are displayed. When displaying this famous scene, a window image (second image) displayed in the above-mentioned scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) is used. That is, in this screen display example, the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) is displayed as the related story effect. As a related story effect, only the window image (second image) may be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol, the SP bonus during the second special symbol is a series of series of story effect patterns during the ST. It is configured so that the related story production is performed by the related story per production pattern for the SP bonus related to the story production. With this configuration, the story production can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the related story production by the SP bonus related story per production pattern depends on the progress of the story in the series of story productions by the ST story production pattern (for example, the value of the ST management counter). It is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, a series of story effects performed in a predetermined section in the special game state (for example, the story section in the ST mode) and a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) in the case of a big hit in the special game state. ) Can be related to the related story production performed in), and an appropriate related story production can be performed in consideration of the time when a big hit occurs.

In the present embodiment, as the degree of progress of the story in the series of story production, the case where the value of the management counter during ST is less than "26" is regarded as the case where the degree of progress of the story is small, and the summary of the story in the series of story production. Is displayed, and the case where the value of the management counter during ST is "26" or more is regarded as the case where the story has a high degree of progress, and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image). Is to be displayed, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the display content of the story summary in the related story production may be different depending on the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter). In this case, for a series of story productions, a summary may be displayed for parts other than those already performed in the story section of ST mode, and a summary may be displayed for the parts already performed in the story section of ST mode. It may be displayed, and for the other parts, the story that was supposed to be performed by a series of story productions may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a summary of the story according to the progress of the story in a series of story productions. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) in the special gaming state (for example, ST mode), the next series It is possible to perform a related story production in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) with the production content of the story production and the production content that does not cause a discrepancy.

Further, for example, according to the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter), the display contents of the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) are further displayed. It may be different. In this case, for a series of story productions, a story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) corresponding to the part other than the part already performed in the story section of the ST mode is displayed. It may be displayed, and for the part already performed in the story section of the ST mode, the window image (second image) corresponding to the part and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) are displayed. For other parts, the story that was supposed to be performed by a series of story productions may be displayed as it is.
That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) according to the progress of the story in a series of story productions. According to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) in the special gaming state (for example, ST mode), the next series It is possible to perform related story production in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) with the production content that does not cause a discrepancy with the production content of the story production, and the window image (second image) used in the series of story production. Since it is also used in the related story production, it is possible to reduce the production image data and secure a larger storage area.

[Screen display example of story production pattern during ST]
60 to 68 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST. In FIGS. 60 to 68, the contents of the production within the basic production time (10s) corresponding to one set (five times of the special symbol game) in the story section of the ST mode are shown. The display area 4A, the set story display area 703 (first image display means), and the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. 57. Therefore, the reference numerals are omitted in FIGS. 60 to 68. Further, the description of the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 is omitted in FIGS. 60 to 68 for convenience of explanation.

In FIG. 60, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is lost in any of the games from the first variation to the fifth variation, and the first variation pattern corresponds to the first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST in a predetermined set when the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern which shows shortening variation) is determined. The remaining effect time is calculated based on the above-mentioned basic effect time (10 s) and the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the in-set counter) (see FIG. 42), and is in the set (1). / 5 to 5/5) indicates the number of games in one set. The same applies to FIGS. 61 to 68. In FIG. 60, since the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story productions in a predetermined set progresses based on the basic production time.

In FIG. 61, in the first and second fluctuation games, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and as the fluctuation pattern, the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first fluctuation time is used. In the third variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern in ST in a predetermined set when the 2nd variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern which shows a normal reach) corresponding to | is determined. In FIG. 61, since the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story productions in a predetermined one set proceed based on the basic production time, and at the end of the predetermined one set, based on the jackpot notification production data. A big hit announcement production will be performed.

In FIG. 62, in the first variation game, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is lost, and the above-mentioned first variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first variation time is determined as the variation pattern. In the variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the variation pattern corresponds to the second variation time (for example, 6s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s). It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story effect pattern during ST in a predetermined set when 2 fluctuation patterns (for example, fluctuation patterns which show normal reach A) are determined. In FIG. 62, since the remaining production time is longer than the fluctuation time, the second time (2) in the set among the in-set productions in the predetermined one set (the part corresponding to the predetermined one set in the series of story productions). For the part corresponding to the 5th (5/5) to the 5th time (5/5), the in-set production is advanced so that the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed for 8 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s. In addition, various modes can be adopted as the mode for advancing the remaining part of the effect in the set. For example, control that changes the playback speed (that is, fast-forward playback) so that the playback time is 6 s when the image data (video data) related to the remaining portion of the effect in the set is normally played back for 8 s. May be performed, or control for changing the frame rate (that is, thinning-out playback) may be performed. Further, these changed image data (video data) may be stored in advance. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 68.

In FIGS. 63 and 64, in the games of the first to third fluctuations, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is lost, and the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the first fluctuation time described above. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and in the fourth fluctuation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the fluctuation pattern is a second fluctuation time (for example, 2s) longer than the above-mentioned first fluctuation time (for example, 2s). During ST in the predetermined one set and the next one set (next set) following the predetermined one set when the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to (10s)) (for example, the fluctuation pattern indicating normal reach B) is determined. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of a story production pattern. In FIGS. 63 and 64, since the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the in-set production in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic production time, and a series of story productions proceed. Here, the effectable time is calculated based on the second variation time (for example, 10 s) and the remaining effect time (for example, 4 s which is the remaining effect time of the fourth variation) (see FIG. 42). In the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the effectable time is 6 s. Further, since the production possible time is 6s, the production end target set is the next set. Then, regarding the in-set production in the next set, among the in-set production in the next set (the part corresponding to the next set in the series of story production), the first (1/5) to the fifth (5/5) in the set. ), The in-set production is advanced so that the production possible time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s.

In FIGS. 65 to 68, in the games of the first to third fluctuations, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the first fluctuation time described above. The pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) is a hit, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (for example, 2s) longer than the above-mentioned first variation time (for example, 2s). When the second fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to 30s) is determined, a predetermined one set, the next one set following the predetermined one set, and the next one set following the next one set 2 It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story production pattern in ST in 1 set after a set and 1 set after 3 sets (after the next set to 3 sets) following 1 set after 2 sets. In FIGS. 65 to 68, since the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the in-set production in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic production time, and a series of story productions proceed. Further, in the screen display example shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, since the effectable time is 26 s, the effect target set is after 3 sets, and the in-set effect after the next set and 2 sets is also the basic effect time. It will be performed on the street and a series of story production will proceed. As for the in-set production after 3 sets, among the in-set effects after 3 sets (the part corresponding to after 3 sets in a series of story productions), the 1st (1/5) to 5th (5) in the set. For the part corresponding to / 5), the in-set production is advanced so that the production possible time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect, which is normally performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time, ends in 6 s.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, among the in-set effects in a predetermined set, the effect ends from the portion corresponding to the fifth time (5/5) in the set to the in-set effects in the next set and two sets later. A window image suggesting an in-set effect after 3 sets, which is a set, is displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) in a special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST. ing. Specifically, the window image suggesting the in-set effect after three sets, which is the effect end target set, is displayed by highlighting, which is a display mode different from the usual one. The display mode different from the normal is not limited to this, and the outer frame of the window image may be a display mode different from the normal, and the semi-transparent image showing a big hit in the window image ( For example, the letter V) may be displayed. Further, the special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST is not limited to displaying the window image in a display mode different from the usual one, and the story image to be displayed in the set story display area 703 (first image display means) is displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode different from the usual one.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) is set as one set in a predetermined section (for example, the story section in the ST mode) in the special gaming state, a series of story production is advanced. , The time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time (for example, 2s) by the predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) is defined as the basic production time (for example, 10s), and the number of sets is based on this basic production time. Advance the story corresponding to. Then, when the fluctuation pattern determined in the case of a big hit is the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second fluctuation time (for example, 30s) longer than the first fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern is within one set. The remaining production time is calculated based on the number of games in the game and the basic production time, and if the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time, the production end target set for the next and subsequent sets is special. By suggesting by the effect mode (for example, the window image suggesting the effect in the set of the effect end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one), the specific game state (for example, SP) in the effect end target set It is configured to notify you of the transition to (bonus).

With this configuration, it is possible to roughly synchronize the production time of a series of story productions executed over multiple games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol with one set as one unit with a simple configuration. At the same time, even if it is decided that it will be a big hit, a big hit notice (specific game) that will advance a series of story productions so as not to cause inconsistency as much as possible and improve the interest for the player. It is possible to give a notice of transition to the state).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the series of story productions, the portion corresponding to the number of target sets suggested by the special production mode (for example, the production in the set of the production end target set) has a second variation time. It is configured to advance the story in sync with the end. With this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the production time of multiple sets in a series of story production with the fluctuation time of the identification symbol, and it is possible to perform a series of story production and a big hit notice in a more comfortable manner. It becomes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the window image (second image) corresponding to the number of sets to be suggested by the special production mode in the series of story production is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one. It is configured. By configuring in this way, the window image (second image) that suggests the story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward will be used to further improve the interest of the jackpot (transition to the specific game state). Notice) will be possible.

[Example of screen display of item look-ahead effect]
FIGS. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the item look-ahead effect. The upper left of FIG. 69 shows an image display example when an effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A before the change, and the upper right of FIG. 69 shows the image before the change. An image display example is shown in the case where the effect image indicating that the plate B is acquired is displayed in the display area 4A, and the lower left of FIG. 69 shows that the plate C is acquired before the change. An image display example is shown in the case where the effect image showing the above is displayed in the display area 4A, and in the lower right of FIG. 69, the effect image showing that the plate D has been acquired before the change is displayed in the display area 4A. An example of displaying an image when it is displayed is shown.

In the effect image showing that the plate A is acquired, it is shown that the expectation type associated with the plate A together with the image of the plate A is a pseudo-continuous effect, indicating that the plate B is acquired. In the effect image, it is shown that the expectation type associated with the plate B is the dialogue effect together with the image of the plate B, and in the effect image showing that the plate C is acquired, the plate C is shown together with the image of the plate C. It is shown that the expectation type associated with is a cut-in effect, and in the effect image showing that the plate D is acquired, the expectation is increased by acquiring the plate D together with the image of the plate D. It is shown to be higher. In this way, before the change, the degree of expectation that the type of the acquired plate (item) is associated with the plate (item) according to the processing result of the item acquisition effect processing (see FIG. 48). It will be notified together with the type.

FIG. 70 shows a case where the pseudo-ream number is “1” (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed once) in the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 44 to 47). It is a figure which shows the screen display example. FIG. 70A shows the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 700, FIG. 70B shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the normal temporary stop, and FIG. 70C shows the effect display using the plate A. (D) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop, and (e) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo-continuous temporary stop, and (e) shows the decorative symbol 700 from the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. Indicates the start of re-variation, and (f) indicates that the decorative symbol 700 has stopped and displayed in the reach state.

In the variation of the item look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 70, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, for example, when the plate A is acquired and it is not notified that the plate A is acquired before the fluctuation, the effect image similar to the effect image shown in the upper left of FIG. 69 is used. It is notified that the plate A has been acquired (see S491 in FIG. 44). Next, when one plate A is acquired, as shown in (b), only one plate A is obtained rather than the predetermined expectation degree (one pseudo-ream) as the expectation of the pseudo-ream production. After the effect display of normal temporary stop with low expectation (indicating 0 times of pseudo-ream) is performed, the effect display using plate A is performed as shown in (c), and based on this plate A, ( As shown in d) and (e), the effect display of the pseudo-ream temporary stop and the re-variation start is performed according to a predetermined degree of expectation (pseudo-ream once). Then, as shown in (f), it is notified whether or not the player is in the reach state and finally becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the plate A is not acquired, as shown in (d) and (e), the effect of pseudo-continuous temporary stop and re-variation start according to a predetermined degree of expectation (pseudo-ream once). The display is done. Then, as shown in (f), it is notified whether or not the player is in the reach state and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 71 shows a case where the pseudo-ream number is “3” (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed three times) in the item look-ahead effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 44 to 47). It is a figure which shows the screen display example in the case where two plates A are acquired. Since (a) to (f) of FIG. 71 are the same as those shown in FIG. 70, the display contents of the screen are omitted in FIG. 71.

Also in the variation of the item look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 71, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, since the number of pseudo-reams is "3" and the number of plates A is 2, so that the plate A is used in the later pseudo-ream production in the fluctuation, the plates are used in the first pseudo-ream. A is not used. Therefore, (d) pseudo-ream temporary stop and (e) re-variation start effect display are performed, and the first pseudo-ream ends. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is "2" and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A is used, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop, and (e) revariation. The start effect display is performed, and the second pseudo-ream ends. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is "1" and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A is used, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop, and (e) revariation. The start effect display is performed, the third pseudo-ream ends, (f) the reach effect display is performed, and it is notified whether or not the final hit will be a big hit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) defined in the item look-ahead effect is 0, a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo-ream) corresponding to the predetermined item is used. A predetermined effect (for example, (d) pseudo-ream temporary stop and (e) re-variation start effect display) in which a predetermined expectation degree (for example, the number of pseudo stations) of the effect) is notified. Is executed, and when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) specified in the item look-ahead effect is 1 or more, the expectation degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo continuous effect) corresponding to the predetermined item. After being notified of an expectation degree that is lower than the predetermined expectation degree as (for example, the number of pseudo stations) by a predetermined number of items (for example, (b) a normal temporary stop effect display is performed), a predetermined degree is determined. A predetermined degree of expectation is notified based on the item (for example, based on (c) the effect display using the plate A) (for example, (d) pseudo-continuous temporary stop and (e) re-operation). The effect display of the start of fluctuation is performed). With this configuration, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

[Modified example of this embodiment]
Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. In each of the following modified examples, each process in the present embodiment shall be performed in the same manner unless otherwise specified.

<Hit effect pattern determination table (variation example)>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table of this modified example. In the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14, the type of the hit effect pattern to be determined is defined according to the lottery value for each type of the hit pattern, but the hit effect pattern determination shown in FIG. 72 is determined. In the table (variation example), the type of hit effect pattern to be determined is further defined according to the winning rate. The winning rate may be determined by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71.

The winning rate is, for example, the number of game balls won in the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, or the general winning opening 40 in a predetermined period, or these. It can be obtained from the number of game balls that have won a prize in a predetermined combination of. Further, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period in the non-probability / non-time saving game state, a certain period in the non-probability / time saving game state, a certain period in the probability change / time saving game state, or a certain period in the jackpot game state (specific game state). , Or any of a predetermined period can be set as a combination thereof. In this modified example, as an example of the winning rate, the number of game balls winning in the first large winning opening 36 / the specific first round game (for example, the 1st round) in the big hit game state (specific game state) is required. The winning rate will be calculated from the time. For example, if the number of game balls that have won the first prize opening 36 is 9, and the time required for a specific first round game in the jackpot game state (specific game state) is 18 s, the prize is won per s. The rate will be 50%. Here, the threshold value of the winning rate can be set as appropriate, but in this modified example, the threshold value of the winning rate of 50% is taken as an example of the threshold value. In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. 72, the description of the hit effect pattern corresponding to the story bonus and the hit effect pattern corresponding to the battle bonus is omitted for convenience of explanation. ..

As shown in FIG. 72, in the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example), as the type of the hit pattern, the music pattern A (which constitutes the success of the live bonus 9R) is the same as the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Music pattern A (reversal) that constitutes success), live bonus 5R success, and music pattern A (failure) that constitutes live bonus 8R failure and live bonus 4R failure are defined. Regarding the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern A (success) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Is stipulated. Regarding the music pattern A (reversal), the music pattern A (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern A (reversing) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Is stipulated. Regarding the music pattern A (failure), the music pattern A (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern A (failure) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Is stipulated. Here, "long" indicates a hit effect pattern in which the effect time (for example, the time during which the music pattern A is output) is set to a relatively long time, and "short" means the effect time. Indicates a hit effect pattern set for a relatively short time. That is, in this modification, the music pattern A (success) long and the music pattern A (success) short both constitute the live bonus 9R success, but the time when the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output in the live bonus. Is a hit effect pattern that is configured to be different.

Similarly, regarding the music pattern B (success), the music pattern B (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern B (success) selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Short is defined, and for music pattern B (reversal), music pattern B (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and music pattern B selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold ( (Reverse) Short is specified, and for music pattern B (failure), music pattern B (failure) long selected when the winning rate is below the threshold and music pattern selected when the winning rate is above the threshold. B (failure) short is specified. Similarly, regarding the music pattern C (confirmed), the music pattern C (confirmed) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold value and the music pattern C (confirmed) selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold value. Confirmed) Short is specified.

Here, the winning rate can be an index of whether or not the player actively launches the game ball using the launching device 26 (that is, whether or not the player is active in the game). Therefore, when the player is active in the game, for example, the music pattern A (success) short is selected as the hit effect pattern, and when the player is not active in the game, for example. By configuring the music pattern A (success) long to be selected as the hit effect pattern, a jackpot game state (specific game state) that matches the player's game tendency (game progress speed) is produced. At the same time, it is possible to make it easier to synchronize the end of the output of the music according to the music pattern with the end of the jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the same hit effect pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)), various methods can be used as methods for different output times. For example, the music pattern A (success) long constitutes each section as shown in the upper part of FIG. 52, and the music pattern A (success) short is an effect corresponding to one or a plurality of sections among the sections. The time may be shortened, or the section where the output is not output may be defined. Further, as a method of shortening the production time, the tempo of the music corresponding to the music pattern may be increased, or the arranged music may be output.

In addition, various timings can be taken as the timing for determining the winning rate.
For example, in the above-mentioned example, the winning rate in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) shifted immediately before the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the live bonus is to be performed this time may be determined. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is updated every time the jackpot game state (specific game state) is reached. In addition, the winning rate from when the power of the game machine is turned on or when returning from a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error indicating that the front frame 3 or the protective glass 7 has been opened, a backup error of the work RAM 73, etc.) The average value may be calculated. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is cleared when the gaming machine is turned off or when a predetermined error occurs.

Further, in the above example, when calculating the winning rate, the number of game balls that have won in the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 / the game ball launched in the big hit game state (specific game state). The winning rate may be calculated from the number of. Also in this case, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the player is active in the game.

<Story production table group>
FIG. 73 is a conceptual diagram showing a story production table group of this modified example. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions are performed in the story section of the ST mode, and when the story section of the ST mode is shifted to the SP bonus, the related story productions related to the series of story productions are performed in the SP bonus. However, in this modification, the production related to a specific story is performed in all the production modes (gaming state), and the story is advanced in a specific story unit.

For example, when the specific story is the first story, in the normal mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding normal mode corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the normal mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect of introducing the character appearing in the first story. Further, in the short mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the short mode corresponding to the first story corresponding to the first story. Further, in the long mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the long mode corresponding to the first story corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the time saving mode, it is possible to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the effect in which the background image related to the first story is displayed. In addition, during the first special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding hit effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the live bonus, the music pattern related to the first story can be selected, in the story bonus, the story pattern related to the first story can be selected, and in the battle bonus, the battle related to the first story. Makes the pattern selectable. Further, during the second special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the hit effect pattern determination table for the first story corresponding SP bonus corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the SP bonus, it is related to the first story depending on whether the production mode before the transition is the time saving mode, the story section of the ST mode, or the battle reach section of the ST mode. The hit effect pattern can be selected. Further, in the ST mode, the production pattern determination table in the ST mode corresponding to the first story corresponding to the first story is referred to, and it is related to the first story depending on whether it is a story section or a battle reach section. It is possible to select the effect pattern to be performed. The same applies when the specific story is the second story or the third story.

In addition, from the first effect control state in which the effect related to the first story is performed (that is, the state in which each effect pattern is selected from the first story effect table group), the effect related to the second story is performed. The effect related to the third story is performed from the transition condition to the second effect control state, which is the state (that is, the state in which each effect pattern is selected from the second story effect table group), and the second effect control state. Various conditions can be taken for the transition condition to the third effect control state, which is a state (that is, a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the third story effect table group). As an example, for example, if a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state and a V prize is obtained during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect is also obtained in the ST mode that shifts thereafter. The control state is continued, and the transition to the second effect control state is performed with the end of the ST mode as a transition condition. In addition, if a non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode that shifts thereafter, and the end of the time saving mode is set as the transition condition. , Shift to the second effect control state. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be performed on the condition that the non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state. That is, at the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during the first special symbol hit), a special gaming state (for example, ST mode), or a time-saving gaming state (for example, time-saving mode), which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, each It can be configured to shift the effect control state (first to third effect control states). With this configuration, even when the player's advantageous state ends, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play by advancing a specific story.

Further, as another example, the transition to the second effect control state is performed on the condition that a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state and a V prize is obtained during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state. If a non-V prize is won during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode that shifts thereafter. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be performed on the condition that a big hit is obtained in the normal mode of the first effect control state. That is, each effect control state (first to third effects) at the time of transition to the specific game state (for example, during the first special symbol hit) or the special game state (for example, ST mode), which is an advantageous game state for the player. It can be configured to shift the control state). With this configuration, when the player shifts to an advantageous state, a specific story progresses, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

It should be noted that various conditions can be taken as the initialization condition for shifting the effect control state to the initial control state (for example, the first effect control state). For example, the initialization condition may be that the gaming machine is turned off or the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs, and the demo display is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 30 minutes or longer). ) The continuation may be an initialization condition.

<Main fluctuation time determination table (variation example)>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a main fluctuation time determination table of this modified example. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 is determined by the main CPU 61 in the story section of the ST mode by performing the ST mode processing (see FIG. 41) and the ST story effect pattern change processing (see FIG. 42). It was supposed that the fluctuation pattern (end timing of the fluctuation time of the identification symbol) and the end of the in-set effect in the series of story effects were synchronized, but in this modified example, the main CPU 61 further ends the in-set effect. The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern to be synchronized (the end timing of the fluctuation time of the identification symbol) is determined. Although the detailed description of the main fluctuation time determination table is omitted in the present embodiment, the same main fluctuation time determination table as shown in FIG. 74 may be adopted, and some or all of them are different. The main fluctuation time determination table may be taken.

In the main fluctuation time determination table (variation example) shown in FIG. 74, the result of the jackpot determination (win), the current game state (non-probability / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probability variation / time reduction), and the reach determination random number. The type of fluctuation pattern to be determined is defined according to various parameters such as the range (0 to 250) and the random number range for effect selection (0 to 99), and the game state is probabilistically changed and the time-saving game state (0 to 99). In the case of ST game state), whether the number of games is "1 to 50 times" (whether it is a story section in ST mode) or "51 to 180 times" (battle reach section in ST mode). The type of fluctuation pattern is specified according to (is it?). Further, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, different types of fluctuation patterns are further defined according to the value of the in-set counter. In the present embodiment, the case where the in-set counter is provided in the work RAM 73 and is counted by the sub CPU 71 is described. However, in this modification, the in-set counter is also provided in the main RAM 63. It is assumed that the number of games in the set is counted by the main CPU 61. Further, the count of the number of games in the probabilistic / shortened game state (ST game state) may be obtained from the value of the probabilistic change number counter. The number of games may be counted.

The reach determination random number range defines a range of reach determination random numbers that determines the reach variation time that determines the reach variation time or does not determine the reach variation time. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state. Further, the effect selection random number range defines the range of the effect selection random number corresponding to the reach determination random number range, the fluctuation time, and the effect content. The effect selection random value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state.

In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. 74, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the selection rate is 96/100 and the variation pattern is “02H”. Is selected, and "03H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 4/100. The fluctuation pattern “02H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is shortened fluctuation A. Further, the fluctuation pattern "03H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the shortened fluctuation B. Here, the fluctuation pattern "02H" corresponds to the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern corresponding to a specific fluctuation time (for example, 2s), and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. .. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the fluctuation pattern "02H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "1" (that is, when it is the first game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "07H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selectivity of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selectivity of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "07H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is the special variation A. Further, the fluctuation pattern "04H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is Super Reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern "05H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is Super Reach B. Here, the fluctuation pattern "07H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "1", the fluctuation pattern "07H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "2" (that is, when it is the second game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "08H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selectivity of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selectivity of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The variation pattern "08H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8000 ms (8 s) and the effect content is the special variation B. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "08H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "2", the fluctuation pattern "08H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "3" (that is, when it is the third game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "09H" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selectivity of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selectivity of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The fluctuation pattern "09H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 6000 ms (6 s) and the effect content is the special fluctuation C. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "09H" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "3", the fluctuation pattern "09H" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the counter in the set is "4" (that is, when it is the fourth game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "0AH" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selectivity of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selectivity of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The fluctuation pattern "0AH" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the special fluctuation D. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "0AH" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "4", the fluctuation pattern "0AH" may always be selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "5" (that is, when it is the fifth game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "0BH" is selected as the variation pattern, with a selectivity of 2/100, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, and with a selectivity of 2/100, "05H" is selected as the variation pattern. Will be done. The fluctuation pattern "0BH" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 2000 ms (2s) and the effect content is the special fluctuation E. Here, similarly to the above, the fluctuation pattern "0BH" corresponds to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "5", the fluctuation pattern "0BH" may always be selected.

As described above, in this modification, the second fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the in-set counter, but as described above, the value of the in-set counter is "1". In some cases, the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 10 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is "2", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 8 s and is in the set. When the value of the counter is "3", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 6 s, and when the value of the counter in the set is "4", the above-mentioned remaining effect in the one set The time is 4 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is "5", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 2 s. That is, in this modification, the variation time is synchronized with the end of the predetermined effect (in-set effect) by determining the variation pattern using the hit effect pattern determination table (transformation example) shown in FIG. 74. The second variation pattern corresponding to is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the production time of a predetermined production (for example, the production in the set) in which a series of productions are executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A first variable winning device (for example, a first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be accepted.
It is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area (for example, a specific area 38A) through which the game medium can pass. With the second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37),
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. When,
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
On condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the end of the specific game state is relative. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, a probability change / time saving game state) that can be easily obtained.
In the specific game state, the first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing the first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times, and
In the specific game state, a second round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a second round game for varying the second variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times, and
A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state.
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state.
It is a game machine equipped with
The second round game execution means can perform a specific second round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area during the execution of the second round game.
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed a specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game executing means, the specified second game is executed at least once by the second round game executing means. The first specific game state in which the round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) and
After the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a second specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), including
The music pattern selection means can select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)) when the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, and the specific music pattern selection means. When the game state control means controls the second specific game state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
In the first music pattern, the first common portion of a predetermined music (for example, the verse of the first section) is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output later.
In the second music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. It is a predetermined music pattern,
The music output means starts at a predetermined time (for example, the first R start at which the initial section is started) regardless of whether the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the previous waiting time), and the output of the predetermined music is started.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of the above can be started.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
It is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area (for example, a specific area 38A) through which the game medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 75) and
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. When,
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
On condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the end of the specific game state is relative. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, a probability change / time saving game state) that can be easily obtained.
In the specific game state, the first variable winning device can be changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the first round game that makes it relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area can be executed a predetermined number of times. First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61),
In the specific game state, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the specific second round game that makes it relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area is executed a predetermined number of times. Possible second round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61),
A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state.
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state.
It is a game machine equipped with
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed a specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game executing means, the specified second game is executed at least once by the second round game executing means. The first specific game state in which the round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) and
After the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a second specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), including
The music pattern selection means can select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)) when the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, and the specific music pattern selection means. When the game state control means controls the second specific game state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
In the first music pattern, the first common portion of a predetermined music (for example, the verse of the first section) is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output later.
In the second music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. It is a predetermined music pattern,
The music output means starts at a predetermined time (for example, the first R start at which the initial section is started) regardless of whether the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the previous waiting time), and the output of the predetermined music is started.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of the above can be started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined music (for example, in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed) The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) in which the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started is started. By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the 1st round), it is not necessary to monitor the round game. , It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means a second specific number of times (for example, eight times of 1 to 8R) that is larger than the first specific number of times, the second round game execution means A third specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed at least once (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 1) and
After the first round game is executed the second specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a fourth specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), including
The music pattern selection means can select a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) when the specific game state control means controls the third specific game state, and the specific music pattern selection means. When the game state control means controls the fourth specific game state, a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
In the third music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, for example). , B melody of the second section) is output, and after a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) has elapsed, the specific part of the predetermined music (for example, the chorus of the third section) is output. Is a predetermined music pattern,
In the fourth music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output. It is a music pattern in which it is determined that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after being output and the specific branching period has elapsed.
The music output means starts outputting the predetermined music from the predetermined time regardless of whether the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of a predetermined music (for example, a music corresponding to the music pattern A) A melody) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. Then, in the third specific game state or the fourth specific game state, the second common part (for example, the B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch) is output. Section) is passed. Then, in the third specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the specific branch period. .. With such a configuration, the player's expectation in a specific gaming state can be further increased.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The music pattern selection means determines the degree of expectation that the first music pattern is selected when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. It is characterized in that the expectation that the third music pattern is selected is higher than the case where any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern that occupies when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern that occupies when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation degree (for example, 18/35). By setting a high degree of expectation (for example, 46/62), after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses, the second common part of the predetermined song (for example, the B melody of the second section) is set. ) Is output, the expectation that the specific second round game will be executed becomes relatively high, so that the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified and specified. It is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and includes the first music and the second music.
When the music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection means, the music pattern selection is higher than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. When the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the means, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means is higher. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, a specific second round game when a music pattern (for example, music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, a music corresponding to music pattern A) is selected. (For example, when the music pattern A is selected, the ratio at which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined) is higher than the expected degree of execution (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B). When the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (for example, when music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined. By setting the ratio) high, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between the songs, and it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the starting storage information is stored by the starting storage information storage means. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays identification information in a variable manner, and
A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to a determination result by the specific game state transition determination means.
The variation display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information for which the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means is stopped and displayed by the identification information display means. On the condition that the game state is controlled to the specific game state, the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and
Multiple types of items (for example, plates A to D) each correspond to a plurality of expectation types (for example, pseudo-continuous production, dialogue production, cut-in production, and other promotion (reversal) production), and the item is displayed. By doing so, the item effect (for example, item look-ahead effect) for notifying the degree of expectation of whether or not the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means is executed. Means (eg, sub CPU 71) and
An item effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of the item effect executed by the item effect execution means is provided.
The item production control means
Whether or not to execute the item effect is determined according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means.
When the item effect is executed, the item effect content (for example, the item effect content) to be executed from among the plurality of item effect contents in which the number of each of the plurality of types of items and the expectation degree of each of the plurality of expectation types are defined. , Item look-ahead production 1 to 24) is decided,
When the number of predetermined items (for example, plate B) specified in the determined item effect content is 0, the expectation degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, dialogue effect) corresponding to the predetermined item is used. The item effect executing means is made to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display based on the dialogue effect data) on which a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, dialogue (red)) is notified (for example, FIG. 44). Perform the process shown in S499),
When the number of the predetermined items specified in the determined item effect content is 1 or more, the expected degree of the predetermined expected degree type corresponding to the predetermined item is higher than the predetermined expected degree. After the low expectation degree (for example, dialogue (green)) is notified by the number of the predetermined item, the predetermined expectation degree is notified based on the predetermined item. The gaming machine is characterized in that the item effect executing means executes the item (for example, performs the process shown in S498 of FIG. 44).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notice (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The item production control means
When the item effect is executed, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information for which the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means is displayed. An item advance notification determining means (for example,) for determining whether or not to notify the type of the item defined in the determined item effect content before being started by the identification information display means (for example, before the change). , Item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 48 by the sub CPU 71)
When the item pre-notification determining means determines that the item type is to be notified, the item pre-notification effect for notifying the item type is caused by the item effect executing means. The game machine described in.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when giving a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific game state), it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (effect based on the start memory before the variable execution). It will be possible.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
When a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the start storage information is stored by the start storage information storage means, the fluctuation pattern determining means shifts to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means. When the determination result of the effect is not obtained, a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, 2000 ms) associated with a specific fluctuation time (for example, 2000 ms) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation time (for example, 4000 ms) is associated. Determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern) that performs shortening fluctuation,
When the specific fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, when the determination result of S483 in FIG. 43 is YES), the advance notification determining means determines the item effect content. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is not determined whether or not to notify the type of the item specified in the item production content determined by the means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even when the item effect (for example, the item look-ahead effect) is executed, the balance of the effect is lost due to the relationship with the fluctuation time (particularly the shortened fluctuation). Can be prevented.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A specific game state for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. Transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) and
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state), the predetermined end condition is satisfied after the specific game state ends (for example, 180 special symbols). A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that can control a special game state (for example, ST game state) that is advantageous for a player different from the specific game state until the game is digested.
A game count counting means (for example, a management counter during ST) that counts the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, a story section in ST mode) in the special game state.
In the special gaming state, a specific gaming state number counting means (for example, ST middle consecutive villa counter) that counts the number of times controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state controlling means, and
Based on the count result by the game count counting means and the count result by the specific game state count means, a series of story effects are executed in the predetermined section, and the story effects are related to the series of story effects in the specific game state. A story production execution means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) for executing a related story production, and
A gaming machine including a story production control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of the series of story productions and the related story productions executed by the story production execution means.
The game number counting means includes a set number counting means (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 41) for counting the number of sets with a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) in the predetermined section as one set.
The story production control means
A story is advanced in the series of story production units based on the number of times controlled by the specific game state counted by the specific game state count means (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 41).
The gaming machine is characterized in that a story in the series of story productions is advanced (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 41) based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the story production (for example, a series of story production) is performed according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) and the number of sets in the special gaming state. It will proceed. Further, in the specific game state, a story effect (for example, a related story effect) related to the story effect (for example, a series of story effects) executed in the special game state is executed. Therefore, the story production can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The story effect control means determines the degree of progress of the story in the series of story effects (for example, the management counter during ST) when the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the story production executing means executes the related story production according to (value).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the specific gaming state, story production (for example, related story production) is performed according to the progress of the story production executed in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to produce a story with an appropriate relationship between the special gaming state and the specific gaming state without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The game machine according to the above description, wherein the related story production is a production that displays a summary (for example, a synopsis) of a story in the series of story productions according to the degree of progress in the series of story productions.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) in the special gaming state, the next series of stories It is possible to perform a related story production in a specific game state with the production content that does not cause a discrepancy with the production content of the production.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The story production execution means is
In the series of story productions, the first image display means (for example, the set) that displays the first image (for example, story images 703a, 703b) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means. Story display area 703) and
In the series of story production, the second image display means (for example, window images 704a, 704b) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward counted by the set number counting means (for example, window images 704a, 704b). For example, the schedule set window display area 704) and is included.
The related story effect is an effect of displaying the second image and the story corresponding to the second image (for example, a famous scene and a description of the famous scene) according to the degree of progress in the series of story effects. The gaming machine described above, characterized by.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story production progresses according to the number of jackpot consecutive villas (for example, the value of the ST middle consecutive villa counter) in the special gaming state, the next series of stories A related story production in a specific game state can be performed with a production content that does not cause a discrepancy with the production content of the production, and a second image (for example, a window image) used in a series of story production can also be used in the related story production. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the production image data and secure a larger storage area.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A specific game that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. State transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays identification information in a variable manner, and
A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to a determination result by the specific game state transition determination means.
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state), after the specific game state ends, a special game state different from the specific game state (for example, ST game state). ), And a special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61).
A game count counting means (for example, a management counter during ST) that counts the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, a story section in ST mode) in the special game state.
A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a series of story effects in the predetermined section based on the count result of the game number counting means.
A game machine including a story effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of the series of story effects executed by the story effect execution means.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
In the predetermined section, when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, the first fluctuation corresponding to the first fluctuation time (for example, 2s) is obtained. A pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern showing shortened fluctuation) can be determined with high probability.
In the predetermined section, when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, the second fluctuation time (for example, for example) longer than the first fluctuation time is obtained. It is possible to determine a second fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to 30s).
The game count counting means
A set number counting means (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 41) that counts the number of sets with a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) in the predetermined section as one set.
The in-set game count counting means (for example, an in-set counter) for counting the number of games in one set is included.
The story production control means
The story in the series of story productions is advanced based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting means (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 41).
In the predetermined section, the time obtained by multiplying the first fluctuation time by the predetermined number of games (for example, 10 s) is set as the basic effect time, and the number of sets in the series of story effects is supported based on the basic effect time. Progress the story (directed in the set) to do
When the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means in the predetermined section, the remaining effect time is determined based on the count result by the game count counting means in the set and the basic effect time. It is determined whether or not the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time (for example, the process of S473 in FIG. 42 is performed), and the second fluctuation time is longer than the remaining production time. When it is determined that is a long time (for example, when the determination result of S473 in FIG. 42 is NO), the number of sets corresponding to the end of the second fluctuation time is set to a special effect mode (for example). By suggesting a window image suggesting an in-set effect of the effect end target set by a display mode different from the usual display mode), the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies that the determination result of is obtained.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a series of story productions executed over a plurality of games and the fluctuation time of the identification symbol are generally synchronized with one set as one unit by a simple configuration. Even if it is decided to shift to a specific game state (for example, to be a big hit) in a game in the middle of a series of story production, the series of story production will be inconsistent as much as possible. It is possible to give a big hit notice (notice of transition to a specific game state), which will advance so as not to occur and improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The story effect control means has the second aspect of the part corresponding to the number of sets (for example, the effect in the set of the effect end target set) that is the target suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it executes control to advance the story in synchronization with the end of the variable time.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if it is decided to shift to the specific game state in the game in the middle of the story production executed over a plurality of games, the story production is inconsistent as much as possible. It is possible to give a big hit notice that will proceed without any trouble and will improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The story production execution means is
In the series of story productions, the first image display means (for example, the set) that displays the first image (for example, story images 703a, 703b) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means. Story display area 703) and
In the series of story production, the second image display means (for example, window images 704a, 704b) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward counted by the set number counting means (for example, window images 704a, 704b). For example, the schedule set window display area 704) and is included.
The story effect control means described above, wherein the second image corresponding to the number of sets to be suggested by the special effect mode is displayed in a display mode different from the usual one. Game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward can be used to give a big hit notice that will further improve the interest. It will be possible.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A first variable winning device (for example, a first large winning opening 36) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which a game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be accepted.
It is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area (for example, a specific area 38A) through which the game medium can pass. With the second variable winning device (for example, the second large winning opening 37),
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. When,
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
On condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the end of the specific game state is relative. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, a probability change / time saving game state) that can be easily obtained.
In the specific game state, the first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing the first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times, and
In the specific game state, a second round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a second round game for varying the second variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times, and
A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state.
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state.
The winning rate determining means (for example, the sub CPU 71) for determining the winning rate of the game medium in the predetermined period of the specific gaming state, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The second round game execution means can perform a specific second round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area during the execution of the second round game.
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed a specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game executing means, the specified second game is executed at least once by the second round game executing means. The first specific game state in which the round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) and
After the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a second specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), including
The music pattern selection means is
When the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) can be selected, and the specific game state control means can select the first music pattern. 2 When controlled to a specific gaming state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
When selecting the first music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)). When long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined first music pattern. Select a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short), which is a relatively short time.
When selecting the second music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)). Long) is selected, and when the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined second music pattern. Select a specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short), which is a relatively short time to be played,
In the first music pattern, the first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output after the music is played.
In the second music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. It is a predetermined music pattern,
The music output means starts at a predetermined time (for example, the first R start at which the initial section is started) regardless of whether the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the previous waiting time), and the output of the predetermined music is started.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of the above can be started.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
It is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area (for example, a specific area 38A) through which the game medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 75) and
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. When,
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
On condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the end of the specific game state is relative. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, a probability change / time saving game state) that can be easily obtained.
In the specific game state, the first variable winning device can be changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the first round game that makes it relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area can be executed a predetermined number of times. First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61),
In the specific game state, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the specific second round game that makes it relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area is executed a predetermined number of times. Possible second round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61),
A music pattern selection means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state control means controls the specific game state.
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state.
The winning rate determining means (for example, the sub CPU 71) for determining the winning rate of the game medium in the predetermined period of the specific gaming state, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed a specified number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) by the first round game executing means, the specified second game is executed at least once by the second round game executing means. The first specific game state in which the round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3) and
After the first round game is executed the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a second specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), including
The music pattern selection means is
When the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) can be selected, and the specific game state control means can select the first music pattern. 2 When controlled to a specific gaming state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
When selecting the first music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reversal)). When long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined first music pattern. Select a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short), which is a relatively short time.
When selecting the second music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)). Long) is selected, and when the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined second music pattern. Select a specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short), which is a relatively short time to be played,
In the first music pattern, the first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses. It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part of the predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) is output after the music is played.
In the second music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed. It is a predetermined music pattern,
The music output means starts at a predetermined time (for example, the first R start at which the initial section is started) regardless of whether the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the previous waiting time), and the output of the predetermined music is started.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of the above can be started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a predetermined music (for example, in the first specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific gaming state in which the specific second round game is not executed) The first common portion (for example, the verse of the first section) of the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Then, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) in which the output of the specific part of the predetermined music is started is started. By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from (during the waiting time before the start of the 1st round), it is not necessary to monitor the round game. , It is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

Further, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a jackpot game state (specific game state) that matches the player's game tendency (game progress speed), and output a predetermined music. It is possible to make it easier to synchronize the end of the jackpot game state (specific game state) with the end of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The specific gaming state is
After the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means a second specific number of times (for example, eight times of 1 to 8R) that is larger than the first specific number of times, the second round game execution means A third specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed at least once (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 1) and
After the first round game is executed the second specific number of times by the first round game executing means, the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means (for example, a fourth specific game state (for example). (Big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), including
The music pattern selection means can select a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) when the specific game state control means controls the third specific game state, and the specific music pattern selection means. When the game state control means controls the fourth specific game state, a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected.
When selecting the third music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)). Long) is selected, and when the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined third music pattern. Select a specific third musical pattern (eg, musical pattern A (success) short) that is relatively short in time.
When selecting the fourth music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)). Long) is selected, and when the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined fourth music pattern. Select a specific fourth music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short), which is a relatively short time to be played,
In the third music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, for example). , B melody of the second section) is output, and after a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) has elapsed, the specific part of the predetermined music (for example, the chorus of the third section) is output. Is a predetermined music pattern,
In the fourth music pattern, the first common portion of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output. It is a music pattern in which it is determined that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after being output and the specific branching period has elapsed.
The music output means starts outputting the predetermined music from the predetermined time regardless of whether the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means.
The predetermined time is the predetermined time when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the music of

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of a predetermined music (for example, a music corresponding to the music pattern A) A melody) is output, and a predetermined branching period (for example, the first branching section) elapses. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reversal of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the predetermined branch period. Then, in the third specific game state or the fourth specific game state, the second common part (for example, the B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch) is output. Section) is passed. Then, in the third specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined song (for example, chorus in the third section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is output after the lapse of the specific branch period. .. With such a configuration, the player's expectation in a specific gaming state can be further increased.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The music pattern selection means determines the degree of expectation that the first music pattern is selected when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. It is characterized in that the expectation that the third music pattern is selected is higher than the case where any of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern that occupies when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern that occupies when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation degree (for example, 18/35). By setting a high degree of expectation (for example, 46/62), after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses, the second common part of the predetermined song (for example, the B melody of the second section) is set. ) Is output, the expectation that the specific second round game will be executed becomes relatively high, so that the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified and specified. It is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
The predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and includes the first music and the second music.
When the music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection means, the music pattern selection is higher than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. When the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the means, the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means is higher. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, a specific second round game when a music pattern (for example, music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, a music corresponding to music pattern A) is selected. (For example, when the music pattern A is selected, the ratio at which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined) is higher than the expected degree of execution (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B). When the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (for example, when music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined. By setting the ratio) high, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between the songs, and it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A specific game that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. State transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) and
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot gaming state), the game is said to occur for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific gaming state ends. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state, and
After the predetermined number of games have been played in the special game state, a normal game state (for example, a normal game state (non-probability / non-probability change / non-probability)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state. Normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls (time reduction)),
A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes an effect related to a specific story in the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state.
A story production control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of a production related to the specific story executed by the story production execution means is provided.
The particular story includes at least a first story (eg, a first story) and a second story (eg, a second story).
The story effect control means is related to at least a first effect control state in which the effect related to the first story is executed by the story effect execution means and the second story by the story effect execution means. An effect control state transition control means that has a second effect control state in which the effect to be performed is executed, and shifts from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition. Including
The predetermined transition condition includes being controlled by the normal game state control means to the normal game state without being controlled by the specific game state control means in the special game state. It is a featured game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a story with appropriate relevance in a plurality of game states, and even when a state advantageous to the player ends, a specific state can be obtained. By advancing the story, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A specific game that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. State transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) and
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot gaming state), the game is said to occur for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific gaming state ends. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state, and
After the predetermined number of games have been played in the special game state, a normal game state (for example, a normal game state (non-probability / non-probability change / non-probability)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state. Normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls (time reduction)),
A story effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes an effect related to a specific story in the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state.
A story production control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the progress of a production related to the specific story executed by the story production execution means is provided.
The particular story includes at least a first story (eg, a first story) and a second story (eg, a second story).
The story effect control means is related to at least a first effect control state in which the effect related to the first story is executed by the story effect execution means and the second story by the story effect execution means. An effect control state transition control means that has a second effect control state in which the effect to be performed is executed, and shifts from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition. Including
The predetermined transition condition is characterized in that it is controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state transition control means, or is controlled to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition control means. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a story having appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and when the player shifts to a state advantageous to the player, a specific story progresses. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
A specific game that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. State transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays identification information in a variable manner, and
A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information that is variablely displayed by the identification information display means according to a determination result by the specific game state transition determination means.
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state), the predetermined game state control means for controlling the predetermined game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state. When,
In the predetermined game state, an in-set game count counting means (for example, an in-set counter) that counts the number of games in the one set, with the predetermined number of games as one set,
An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a predetermined effect (for example, an in-set effect) capable of executing a series of effects over the predetermined number of games in the predetermined game state.
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the predetermined effect is provided.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
In the predetermined gaming state, when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, the first variation corresponding to the specific fluctuation time (for example, 2s) is obtained. The pattern (for example, shortened variation A) can be determined with high probability.
In the predetermined gaming state, when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, a second fluctuation pattern different from the first fluctuation pattern (for example, for example). Special fluctuations A to E) can be determined,
The effect control means sets the time (for example, 10 s) obtained by multiplying the specific variable time by the predetermined number of games as the basic effect time, and executes the predetermined effect on the effect executing means based on the basic effect time. Let me
The variation pattern determining means counts by the in-set game count counting means when the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means in the predetermined gaming state. Based on the result, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time to be synchronized with the end of the predetermined effect can be determined with high probability.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a predetermined effect (for example, the effect in the set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol are appropriately configured in a simple configuration. Since it is possible to synchronize with, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (become a big hit) in a game in the middle of a predetermined production without increasing the control load and the amount of information stored in the storage area. Even if it is decided, it is possible to proceed with the predetermined production as much as possible without causing any discrepancy.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78.

FIG. 75 is a perspective view showing a large winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 75 is provided with only one large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 75, a large winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the grand prize opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. A large winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the large winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39'that can be displaced to the left or right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B inside the ball passage 37B. The position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a solid line in FIG. 75 is the position after the displacement, and the position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a virtual line in FIG. 75 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39'switches the specific region 38A into an open state or a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 75, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is given. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap between the displacement member 39'and the right wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39'is in a fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball can pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed at any of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed in the second position, the game ball always passes through a specific area if a prize is won in the large winning opening, so that the game is more advantageous to the player than the one according to the above-described embodiment. Modes can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 75, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. V prize is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the displacement member 39'and the left wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Become.

Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', it is possible to shift to a probabilistic gaming state or the like after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state. That is, according to the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 75, even when only one large winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute a one-round game and a specific second-round game that makes it relatively easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, two large winning openings (variable winning devices) are placed on the game board. ) Is difficult to secure, but it is easy to shift to the special gaming state according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, or It is possible to provide a game machine having a game property that makes it difficult.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing pattern (modification example) of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern of FIG. 76. The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 75.

As shown in FIG. 76, the modified example of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one large winning opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 77, the displacement member 39'that opens / closes the specific area 38A is set to the operating state only at the 10th R as an example, and is in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 75. Become. On the other hand, at the 1st to 9th rounds and the 11th to 16th rounds, the displacement member 39'is in an inactive state and is in a state shown by a virtual line in FIG. 75. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be realized.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol without providing a specific area while providing only one big winning opening. It is applied to.

As shown in FIG. 78, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, when data is not stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored.
On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the process to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU uses a jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability determination table with a small number of jackpot determination values, depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Refer to the jackpot judgment table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area and the selected jackpot determination table, which are extracted when the game ball wins a prize. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, either a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, when it determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, the main CPU executes a large winning opening opening display command, a large winning opening opening data set, and the like.
When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot, the process is transferred to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability changing gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the jackpot game state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation jackpot, the state shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the end. When the game shifts to such a non-probability game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the jackpot game state based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot, the transition to the probability variation game state is made without fail after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to such a probabilistic gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In a pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing an effect mode similar to that of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a round in which a prize is easily entered in the grand prize opening.

The pachinko gaming machine on which the special symbol control process shown in FIG. 78, which is applicable to the present invention, is executed is not limited to the one provided with only one large winning opening. Similar to the above-described embodiment, a plurality of starting regions (for example, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33) and a plurality of large winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second winning opening 37). And may be provided, and a specific area may not be provided in each of the large winning openings. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, the processes of S1000 to S1002 are performed, and when a big hit occurs, in the process of S1003, the first large winning opening 36 is used. While the round game in which the open state and the closed state are alternately controlled is executed a plurality of times, when the game ball passes through the second starting port 33, the processes S1000 to S1002 are similarly performed, and the jackpot is hit. In the case of S1003, in the process of S1003, a round game in which the open state and the closed state are alternately controlled is executed a plurality of times may be applied to the second large winning opening 37. Further, also in such a pachinko game machine, a plurality of start memory information is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (1) based on the winning of the game ball for the first start port 32, as in the above-described embodiment. It is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (4), and a plurality of start storage information is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start based on the winning of the game ball for the second start port 33. It is assumed that it is stored in the storage area (4), and when the start storage information is stored in both start storage areas, the start storage information stored in the second special symbol start storage area is preferentially digested. You can do it like this.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way may have at least some specifications different from those of the above-described embodiment. An example of the modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84.

[Game state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example)]
First, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As in the above-described embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the pachinko gaming machine of another embodiment (modification example), a normal mode, a challenge mode, a premium mode, and a rush mode may be implemented as the effect mode in the normal game state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of another embodiment (modification example), as the effect mode in the big hit game state, the live bonus and the challenge bonus, which are in the first special symbol, and the first or second in the second special symbol are in the production mode. A rush bonus, which is 2 in special symbol per hit (sometimes simply referred to as "second special symbol per hit"), may be implemented. Of course, some of the effect modes shown in FIG. 79 may be adopted, and for the other effect modes, the effect mode of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be adopted. That is, the present implementation is performed by combining an arbitrary effect mode among the effect modes of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 7 and an arbitrary effect mode among the effect modes of another embodiment (modification example) shown in FIG. 79. A pachinko gaming machine of the form or another embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine can also be configured.

The normal mode is a non-probable and non-time-saving game state, or a probable and non-time-saving game state production mode. The normal mode is an effect mode in which the player stays when neither of the challenge mode, the premium mode, the rush mode, the first special symbol hit, or the second special symbol hit is in progress. For example, in the challenge mode, when the specified number of special symbol games (20 times) are digested, the challenge mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the rush mode, when the specified number of times (100 times) of the special symbol game is digested, the rush mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol, it becomes a live bonus or a challenge bonus that is being hit by the first special symbol. Transition. Although not shown in FIG. 79, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. It may shift to the rush bonus, which is hitting the symbol.

Further, as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but the combination mode of "7" as a specific display mode (that is, , "7-7-7") is stopped and displayed, it is confirmed that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol described later, and other combinations as a specific display mode. When the mode (that is, other than "7-7-7") is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the jackpot symbol corresponds to other than the "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol described later.
However, even if the combination mode other than "7-7-7" is stopped and displayed and the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that the jackpot gaming state of "Probability Change 2" of the first special symbol described later will be performed. Therefore, even in the normal mode and the challenge mode, the expectation that the player is in a probabilistic gaming state that is advantageous to the player is maintained. That is, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the probabilistic gaming state is hidden.

Even in the case of shifting to the jackpot game state of "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol described later, a combination mode other than "7-7-7" is displayed as the first stop display combination mode. After that, during the live bonus or the challenge bonus, the combination mode of the decorative symbols changes (promotes) according to a specific condition, and finally the combination mode of "7-7-7" is stopped and displayed, which will be described later. 1 It may be determined that the jackpot symbol corresponds to the "probability variation 1" of the special symbol. In this case, if the live bonus is in progress, it may be notified that the music pattern will be promoted according to the music pattern described in the present embodiment. For example, if the player shifts to the jackpot game state of "Probability Change 1" of the first special symbol, which will be described later, and the live bonus production mode is during the first special symbol hit, the live bonus (success) is obtained. When the music pattern is selected and the game shifts to the "probability variation 2" or "normal 1" jackpot game state of the first special symbol, which will be described later, the live bonus production mode is during the first special symbol hit. In that case, a music pattern that becomes a live bonus (failure) may be selected.

The challenge mode is a production mode of a non-probable and non-time-saving game state, or a probable and non-time-saving game state. The challenge mode is executed after the combination mode of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed except for "7-7-7" during the first special symbol hit, and the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot symbol is completed. It should be noted that the challenge mode is after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol "probability variation 2" described later, but after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol "normal 1" described later. However, it continues until the 20 special symbol games are digested, and when the 20 special symbol games are digested without shifting to the jackpot game state again, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. That is, there is a possibility that the probabilistic gaming state is hidden in the challenge mode.

Further, the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the challenge mode is basically the same as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the above-mentioned normal mode, but a different combination mode may be displayed. For example, as described above, when shifting from the normal mode to the first special symbol hit, which of the "probability change 1", "probability change 2", and "normal 1" big hit game state, which will be described later, is in the big hit game state. , It was possible to make it impossible to judge from the first combination mode, but in the challenge mode, when shifting to the jackpot game state of "probability change 1" described later, the combination of "7-7-7" When the mode is stopped and displayed from the beginning and shifts to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" described later, it is a combination mode other than "7-7-7" and a predetermined combination mode (for example, an odd number combination mode). ) Stops and displays, and shifts to the jackpot game state of "normal 1" described later, a combination mode other than "7-7-7" and different from the predetermined combination mode (for example, even number). The combination mode) may be stopped and displayed. Further, this may be similarly configured in the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode and the challenge mode, the expected degree in which the probabilistic gaming state is hidden may be notified by the combination mode in which the stop display is displayed. For example, when the above-mentioned predetermined combination mode is stopped and displayed, the probability that the probability variation game state is hidden is relatively high (that is, the probability of being selected as the jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 2" is high. , It is higher than the probability of being selected as the jackpot symbol corresponding to "normal 1"), and when a combination mode different from the above-mentioned predetermined combination mode is stopped and displayed, the probability variation game state is hidden. Even if the degree of expectation is relatively low (that is, the probability of being selected as the jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 2" is lower than the probability of being selected as the jackpot symbol corresponding to "normal 1"). Good.

The premium mode is a production mode in which the game is probable and time-saving, and the combination mode of "7-7-7" is finally set regardless of whether the jackpot symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is executed after the end of the jackpot game state that is displayed as stopped. Further, in the rush mode, when the specified number of times (100 times) of the special symbol game is digested and the game is in a probabilistic and time-saving game state, the rush mode is shifted to the premium mode. That is, the premium mode is an effect mode in which the most advantageous gaming state (a gaming state that is both a probabilistic gaming state and a time-saving gaming state) in the normal gaming state is determined. In the pachinko gaming machine of another embodiment (modification example), when the pachinko gaming machine is in the probabilistic and time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic and time-saving gaming state continues until the next transition to the jackpot gaming state (“next time”). It has become like. Therefore, the premium mode is a production mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of other production modes. However, as in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the probabilistic and time-saving game state ends after a specified number of times (for example, 180 times), and the player stays in the premium mode until the specified number of special symbol games are exhausted. Good. Further, although not shown in FIG. 79, in the premium mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed. It may shift to a live bonus or a challenge bonus that is hitting a symbol.

The rush mode is a production mode of a probabilistic and time-saving game state, or a non-probability and time-saving game state. In the second special symbol hit middle 2, the rush mode is stopped and displayed when the combination mode of the decorative symbols is other than "7-7-7", and is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol. In the rush mode, until the specified number of special symbol games (100 times) are exhausted, it is not specified whether the current game state is a probabilistic and time-saving game state or a non-probability and time-saving game state. , When the specified number of special symbol games are digested, if it is a probabilistic and time-saving game state, it shifts from the rush mode to the premium mode, and while it is notified that it is a probable change and time-saving game state, it is non-probable and non-probable If it is in the time-saving game state (that is, if the time-saving game state ends), the mode shifts from the rush mode to the normal mode. Only in the normal mode in this case, it is determined that the game is in a non-probable change and a non-time saving game state. Although not shown in FIG. 79, in the rush mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed. It may shift to a live bonus or a challenge bonus that is hitting a symbol.

As the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the premium mode and the rush mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but the combination of "7" as a specific display mode is displayed. When the mode (that is, "7-7-7") is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the jackpot symbol corresponds to the "probability variation 3" of the second special symbol described later, and the mode is set as a specific display mode. When the other combination mode (that is, other than "7-7-7") is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the jackpot symbol corresponds to other than the "probability variation 3" of the second special symbol described later. However, even when shifting to the jackpot game state corresponding to "Probability Change 3", the combination mode other than "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed, and it corresponds to "Probability Change 4". Even in the case of shifting to the jackpot game state, the combination mode of "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed. Further, the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the premium mode and the rush mode may be configured to be basically the same as the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the above-mentioned normal mode and challenge mode. For example, by replacing "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", and "normal 1" of the first special symbol with "probability variation 3", "probability variation 4", and "time reduction 1" of the second special symbol, it is normal. It is also possible to have a similar correspondence between the combination mode in the mode and the challenge mode and the combination mode in the premium mode and the rush mode.

The live bonus during the first special symbol hit is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 1 ("probability variation 1" (substantially 15R)), and is a premium after the jackpot ends. This is a production mode in which the transition to the mode is notified and the production mainly by the music is executed. In addition, the challenge bonus during the first special symbol hit is that the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is hit pattern 2 ("probability variation 2" (substantial 15R)) or hit pattern 3 ("normal 1" (substantial 15R)). This is an effect mode in which an effect is executed in conjunction with the corresponding jackpot game state, and an effect of notifying the transition to the challenge mode after the end of the jackpot is executed. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 2 (“probability variation 2” (substantial 15R)) or the hit pattern 3 (“normal 1” (substantial 15R)). Even if there is, the live bonus may be selected. In this case, depending on the music pattern as described in the present embodiment, whether to finally shift to the premium mode or the challenge mode. You may be notified. Further, in the challenge bonus, depending on whether the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 2 (“probability variation 2” (substantial 15R)) or the hit pattern 3 (“normal 1” (substantial 15R)). Different effects may be executed with a predetermined probability. That is, during the challenge bonus, it may be notified with a predetermined probability whether or not the challenge mode after the end of the challenge bonus is in the probabilistic game state.

As for the rush bonus during the second special symbol hit, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is the hit pattern 4 ("probability variation 3" (substantial 15R)), the hit pattern 5 ("probability variation 4" (substantial 15R)), and the hit. This is an effect mode that is executed in any of the jackpot game states of pattern 6 (“time saving 1” (substantially 15R)). In this case, as described above, when the decorative symbol combination mode is finally stopped and displayed at "7-7-7", the mode shifts to the premium mode after the rush bonus ends, and the decorative symbol combination mode is final. When the stop display is made other than "7-7-7", the mode shifts to the rush mode after the end of the rush bonus.
For example, a premium bonus effect mode is provided as the effect mode of 1 in the 2nd special symbol, and the mode shifts to the premium bonus effect mode as the effect mode of the 2nd special symbol regardless of the combination mode of the decorative symbols. If this is the case, it is confirmed that the player will switch to the premium mode after the end of the jackpot game state, and if the player shifts to the rush bonus production mode as the second special symbol hit, the rush will occur after the end of the jackpot game state. The transition to the mode may be confirmed.

It should be noted that between the production modes shown in FIG. 79, even if not illustrated and explained, it is assumed that the transition is possible with the transition of the gaming state, and the mode is not limited to the range shown and explained. ..

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of another embodiment (modification example), after the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is completed, the jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) controlled to the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state) is completed. ) Will be described by taking the jackpot gaming states of the hit pattern 1, the hit pattern 2, the hit pattern 4, and the hit pattern 5 described later as an example, and after the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is completed, the probabilistic gaming state (probability changing gaming state () As the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) that is not controlled by the special gaming state), the jackpot gaming states of the hit pattern 3 and the hit pattern 6 described later are described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, as in the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning is easy may be set as the first specific gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning is not easy may be set as the second specific gaming state. That is, the "first specific gaming state" may include a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) that is likely to shift to a probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state) if the player plays a game in a normal manner. The "second specific gaming state" includes a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) in which there is a low possibility of transition to a probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state) even if the player plays a game in a normal manner. It is possible.

[Specifications of a game machine according to another embodiment (modification example)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, in another embodiment (modification example), the hit probability of the special symbol is 1 / 319.69 (205/65536) at the time of low probability (non-probability variation game state), and is high probability. At the time (probability change game state), it is 1 / 43.69 (1500/65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested as in the present embodiment. The probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state) is such that the probability variation game state continues until the next transition to the jackpot game state ("until the next time").

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 1, and 15R is given as the number of rounds of the round game (of which the actual number of rounds that can easily win the prize opening is 15R), and the jackpot game state. A live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is a big hit of "7-7-7". The probability (rush rate) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 25/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 2, the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), the challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "7-7". It is a big hit other than "-7". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 25/100.

In the big hit symbol "normal 1" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is 3, the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), the challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "7-7". It is a big hit other than "-7". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "normal 1" of the first special symbol is set to 50/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 3" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 4, the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), the rush bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "7-7". -7 ”It is a big hit. The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the second special symbol is set to 25/100.

In the jackpot symbol "Probability 4" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 5, the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), the rush bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "7-7". It is a big hit other than "-7". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "Probability Change 4" of the second special symbol is set to 25/100.

In the big hit symbol "time saving 1" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 6, the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 15R), the rush bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is "7-7". It is a big hit other than "-7". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "time saving 1" of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 9 for both the 1st major winning opening 36 and the 2nd major winning opening 37. The time saving performance (specification of the time saving game state) is set to continue up to 100 times during a high probability (while in the probabilistic game state) or in the non-probability and time saving game state. The number of prize balls is 3 for each prize in the first starting port 32, 1 for each prize in the 2nd starting port 33, and 10 for each prize in the general winning opening 40. The number of prizes is set to 15 for each prize in the prize openings (first prize opening 36 and second prize opening 37).

The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0 at a low probability and 1/1 at a high probability. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one.

The distribution of special symbols in other embodiments (variants) is not limited to this, and other jackpot symbols may be set. For example, "probability 1" may be provided as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In the jackpot symbol "Sudden 1" of this second special symbol, the hit pattern is 7, and the number of rounds is 15R (of which the actual number of rounds is 0R), and it is confirmed that the production mode will shift to the premium mode after the end. The rank-up bonus is executed, and the production content may be a big hit other than "7-7-7". Then, the inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "Crash 1" of the second special symbol may be set to 25/100. In this case, the inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "time reduction 1" of the second special symbol may be set to 25/100.

If such a big hit symbol "probability 1" of the second special symbol is provided, for example, in the premium mode, the jackpot symbol "probability 1" of the second special symbol is determined, and the game ball is paid out. However, it is shown that the premium mode will continue next time after the rank-up bonus, and in the rush mode, the jackpot symbol "Sudden 1" of the second special symbol is decided, so that the game ball However, since it is shown that the next production mode will be promoted to premium mode through the rank-up bonus, the game section that is advantageous to the player will be continued for a longer time without excessive payout of the game ball. Can be made to. In addition, during the rank-up bonus, the specific suggestion effect described later is not executed, but it may be executed.

[Specific suggestion effect in the gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 84, a specific suggestion effect that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example) will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example), when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the jackpot gaming state under the gaming state, the effect mode and the specifications described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, It is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect in which specific information useful to the player is notified.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example), the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (upper limit of 9 pieces) is won (over winning) with respect to the large winning opening 36 or the large winning opening 37. ), And according to the judgment result, the number of over-winning game balls in the jackpot game state is memorized, and when the memorized number of game balls satisfies a predetermined condition, It is decided that a specific suggestion effect will be executed. It should be noted that this shows an example of a predetermined condition in which the specific suggestion effect can be executed, and the specific suggestion effect may be executed with other conditions as the predetermined conditions. Further, similarly to those described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the conditions for satisfying the predetermined conditions including other conditions are determined from a plurality of conditions, and the determined conditions satisfy the predetermined conditions. When this happens, the specific suggestion effect may be executed.

<First aspect of specific suggestion effect>
First, the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram showing a specific suggestion effect execution determination table A of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example) of the present invention, and FIG. 81 (b) is a diagram showing another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table A of the pachinko game machine which concerns on (modification example), and (c) is the specific suggestion effect display of the pachinko game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the pattern A.

When the sub CPU 71 determines in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 38 that it has received a start winning command (or may be a variation pattern specification command) as the read command, it determines that the sub CPU 71 shifts to the jackpot game state. When it is determined whether or not there is the start memory information to be performed and it is determined that there is the start memory information determined to shift to the jackpot game state, refer to the specific suggestion effect execution determination table A shown in FIG. 81 (a). However, the jackpot type is a jackpot that has a combination mode other than the above-mentioned "7-7-7", and the jackpot shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (a jackpot other than "7-7-7"). (Probability change)) or a big hit that is a combination mode other than the above-mentioned "7-7-7" and does not shift to the probability change game state after the end of the big hit game state (other than "7-7-7"). Depending on whether it is a big hit (non-probability change)), it is decided whether to "execute" or "do not execute" the specific suggestion effect.

The time for deciding whether to "execute" or "do not execute" the specific suggestion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned time. For example, in a game that shifts to the jackpot game state, when the variation display of the decorative symbol (or special symbol) is started (for example, when the symbol variation start command is transmitted from the main CPU 61, the symbol variation start. It may be when the decorative symbol (or special symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, when the symbol stop command is received), or when the jackpot game state is started (for example, hit start). It may be when a specific round game (for example, the 5th round) in the jackpot game state is started (for example, when a specific round-to-round display command is received).
That is, whether or not the specific suggestion effect can be executed can be executed at an arbitrary timing from the time when the game ball passes through the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 until the start of a specific round game in the jackpot game state. It should be decided.

When the sub CPU 71 determines to "execute" the specific suggestion effect, the sub CPU 71 subsequently refers to the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 81 (b), and has a plurality of display patterns according to the jackpot type. One display pattern is determined from (A-1 to A-5). The contents of the display patterns (A-1 to A-5) in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect are as shown in FIG. 81 (c).

For example, the display pattern A-1 and the display pattern A-3 are display patterns in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 5 as a predetermined condition, and the display pattern A-2 and the display pattern A- Reference numeral 4 denotes a display pattern in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 10 as a predetermined condition, and display pattern A-5 is set to 1 in the number of over-winning game balls as a predetermined condition. It is a display pattern. Further, the display pattern A-3, the display pattern A-4, and the display pattern A-5 are probable changes after the jackpot game state is completed as specific information useful to the player when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is a display pattern (first notification pattern) in which information suggesting that the game is controlled is notified, and the display pattern 1 and the display pattern 2 are useful for the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This is a display pattern (second notification pattern) in which specific information is not notified.

Here, an example of a screen display when the first notification pattern or the second notification pattern is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 84. (A) to (e) of FIG. 84 show an example of screen display when the display pattern A-1 is determined, and FIGS. 84 (a) to (d) and (f) show the display. It shows an example of the screen display when the pattern A-3 is decided. In the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification example), the liquid crystal display device 4 will be used as an example of the information notification means for notifying specific information and predetermined information described later, but the information notification means Is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 4 as the information display means. For example, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c may be used as the information notification means, or the lamp / LED 27 may be used. Further, the movable effect device 42 and other movable accessories may be used. That is, all the various devices capable of notifying the player of information can be applied as the information notifying means.

For example, when the display pattern A-1 is determined, when the first over-winning occurs in the round game after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), (a) of FIG. As shown, when "Character 1" is displayed, the characters "Special notification chance!" Indicates that the specific suggestion effect has started, and the line of "Character 1" meets the predetermined conditions. , The text "Clearing the conditions and suggesting useful information!", Which indicates that specific information that is useful to the player will be notified, and the current number of over-winnings are displayed. The predetermined conditions that have been determined may or may not be specified to the player, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (e).

Next, when the second over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), "Character 2" is displayed and lines unique to "Character 2" are displayed. Next, when the third over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), "Character 3" is displayed and lines unique to "Character 3" are displayed. Next, when the fourth over-winning occurs, as shown in (d) of FIG. 84, "Character 4" is displayed and lines unique to "Character 4" are displayed. In addition, each character is a related character, including "Character 5" described later. The related characters are, for example, "character 1", "character 2", "character 3", and "character" in the above-mentioned character set to appear in order in the story section, and in the above-mentioned reach effect and cut-in effect. It can be a character set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of "4" and "character 5".

Further, the lines of "Character 1" to "Character 4" are not limited to the unique lines, but may be fluctuating lines. For example, when the predetermined predetermined condition is not specified, a line suggesting (or notifying) the predetermined condition may be displayed by lottery (or depending on the display pattern). Specifically, when the number of over-winning game balls is set to 5 as a predetermined condition, when the dialogue suggesting this predetermined condition is displayed in "Character 2", the line is displayed. As the line of "Character 2", a line such as "If you win 3 more over ... ??" may be displayed.

Further, for example, similarly to the dialogue effect in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that specific information is transmitted may be displayed differently depending on the color of the dialogue. Specifically, among the lines of "Character 1" to "Character 4", a plurality of colors (for example, white, yellow, green, and red) having different expectations are defined for the lines of at least one or more characters. However, when the first notification pattern is determined, it is sufficient to make it easier to select a line of a color having a higher expectation than when the second notification pattern is determined. If it is decided to "execute" the specific suggestion effect and the plate B described in the present embodiment is acquired, the plate B is prevented from being used in the fluctuation and the acquisition thereof. The plate B being used may be used in the jackpot game state. Then, for example, when a plurality of colors are specified in the dialogue of "Character 1", the degree of expectation is lower than the predetermined color of the dialogue of "Character 1" according to the number of plates B. After displaying the color dialogue, the plate B may be acted on to display the predetermined color of the “character 1” dialogue.

In addition, when it is decided to "execute" the specific suggestion effect, if the plate D described in the present embodiment is acquired, the plate D is prevented from being used in the fluctuation, and the acquisition thereof. The plate D may be used in the jackpot game state. Then, depending on the number of plates D, the round game in which the specific suggestion effect is started may be accelerated, or the number of over prizes, which is a predetermined condition, may be reduced. For example, when one plate D is acquired and the display shown in FIG. 84 (a) is performed, the plate D is operated even when the over-winning has not occurred, and the plate D is operated to be performed, as shown in FIG. 84. The display may be changed so that the display shown in (b) is performed.

Next, when the fifth over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), the "character 5" described later is not displayed, and specific information useful to the player is not notified. ..
However, in FIG. 84 (e), the "character 5" described later is displayed, but as a line of the "character 5" described later, it is controlled to the non-probability changing game state after the jackpot game state ends. The text "No chance after the big hit !?" may be displayed to indicate that "Character 5" will be described later. "After the big hit, the probability change will not be hidden. The character "" may be displayed to definitively notify that the game state is a non-probable change and a non-time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, when the display pattern A-3 is determined, when the 1st to 4th over prizes occur in the round game after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), the display pattern A-1 Is determined, the display as shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 84 is performed, and when the fifth over prize occurs, it is shown in (f) of FIG. 84. As shown above, "Character 5" is displayed, and the characters "Clear the conditions!", Which indicates that the predetermined conditions have been met, and the lines of "Character 5" are displayed. The text "Big chance after the big hit !?" indicating that it is controlled by the player, and the number of over-winnings as a predetermined condition achieved this time are displayed. However, in (f) of FIG. 84, as the line of "Character 5", the characters "Probability change is hidden after the end of the big hit" is displayed, and the probability change and non-time reduction after the end of the big hit game state are displayed. You may make sure that you are in a gaming state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the other embodiment (modification example), the above-mentioned specific suggestion effect can be performed in the jackpot gaming state. Then, in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect, when the first notification pattern is determined, each time an over-winning occurs, a specific over-winning is performed until the number of over-winning game balls satisfies a predetermined condition. The contents of the predetermined information (information about "Character 1" to "Character 4") related to the information (information about "Character 5") are sequentially changed and notified, and the number of over-winning game balls satisfies the predetermined condition. When the condition is satisfied, as specific information (information about the "character 5"), information suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled to the probabilistic game state is notified after the jackpot game state ends. On the other hand, when the second notification pattern is determined, specific information (related to "character 5") is similarly obtained each time an over-winning occurs, until the number of over-winning game balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Information) The contents of the predetermined information (information about "Character 1" to "Character 4") related to the information) are sequentially changed and notified, but when the number of over-winning game balls satisfies the predetermined condition. However, specific information (information about "Character 5") is not notified.

The display mode for sequentially changing the specific information, the predetermined information, and the predetermined information is not limited to the above. For example, although the displayed characters are the same, different lines may be displayed each time an over-winning occurs, so that the display mode may be changed. In addition, for example, a display object such as a meter is displayed, the state in which the meter is filled each time an over-winning occurs is displayed, and the meter is displayed to be full to notify specific information. It may be done. In this case, the filling speed of the meter may be different according to the determined display pattern. Further, for example, a specific suggestion effect is configured as a battle effect between a ally character and an enemy character, and a state in which the gauge indicating the hit point of the enemy character decreases each time an over prize occurs is displayed, and the gauge becomes 0. Specific information may be notified by performing the above. That is, it is possible to sequentially change a specific display object each time an over-winning occurs, and by causing the specific display object to have a specific display mode, specific information can be notified.

Further, for example, the same applies to the case where the specific suggestion effect is performed by the movable accessory, and the operation of the movable accessory is sequentially changed each time an over prize is generated, and the operating state of the movable accessory is changed. It is also possible to notify specific information by being in a specific state. The same applies to the sound output mode by the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the light emission mode by the lamp / LED 27.

Further, the display patterns A-1 to A-5 shown in FIG. 81 (c) are merely examples, and other display patterns may be provided. For example, as the first notification pattern in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect, for example, when the first to fourth over prizes are generated, the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (d) is performed. When the 5th to 9th (or 5th) over-winning occurs, the display as shown in (e) of FIG. 84 is performed, and the 10th (or 6th) over-winning occurs. Therefore, a display pattern for displaying as shown in FIG. 84 (f) may be further provided. In this case, even when the display as shown in FIG. 84 (e) is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being less motivated to win an over prize.

Further, when the sub CPU 71 decides to "execute" the specific suggestion effect, the sub CPU 71 further determines from what round the specific suggestion effect is started (that is, the above-mentioned specific round game) by lottery. You may try to do it. In this case, if the specific suggestion effect is started from a relatively early round game, the predetermined condition is likely to be satisfied, and if the specific suggestion effect is started from the relatively late round game, it is difficult to satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to make it more diverse whether or not specific information is notified in the specific suggestion effect.

<Second aspect of specific suggestion effect>
Next, the second aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82A is a diagram showing a specific suggestion effect execution determination table B of the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification) of the present invention, and FIG. 82B is a diagram showing another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table B of the pachinko game machine which concerns on (modification example), and (c) is the specific suggestion effect display of the pachinko game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the pattern B. In the following, the description of the part common to the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be omitted, and only the part different from the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be described. Further, the various changes shown in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect can also be applied to the second aspect of the specific suggestion effect.

When the sub CPU 71 determines in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 38 that it has received a start winning command (or may be a variation pattern specification command) as the read command, it determines that the sub CPU 71 shifts to the jackpot game state. When it is determined whether or not there is the start memory information to be performed, and it is determined that there is the start memory information determined to shift to the jackpot game state, and the current production mode is not the premium mode, FIG. 82 shows. Refer to the specific suggestion effect execution decision table B shown in (a), and whether the jackpot type is a jackpot (big hit (probability change) other than the premium mode) that shifts to the probability change game state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a jackpot game. It is determined whether to "execute" or "do not execute" the specific suggestion effect depending on whether it is a jackpot that does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the state (a jackpot other than the premium mode (non-probability change)).

When the sub CPU 71 determines to "execute" the specific suggestion effect, the sub CPU 71 subsequently refers to the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 82 (b), and has a plurality of display patterns according to the jackpot type. One display pattern is determined from (B-1 to B-5). The contents of the display patterns (B-1 to B-5) in the second aspect of the specific suggestion effect are as shown in FIG. 82 (c). The display pattern (B-1 to B-5) shown in FIG. 82 (c) shows an example of the display pattern as in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect.

For example, the display pattern B-1 and the display pattern B-3 are display patterns in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 5 as a predetermined condition, and the display pattern B-2 and the display pattern B- Reference numeral 4 denotes a display pattern in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 10 as a predetermined condition, and display pattern B-5 is set to 1 in the number of over-winning game balls as a predetermined condition. It is a display pattern. Further, the display pattern B-3, the display pattern B-4, and the display pattern B-5 provide specific information useful to the player when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, and the current jackpot game state is after the end of the display pattern B-3, the display pattern B-4, and the display pattern B-5. It is a display pattern (first notification pattern) in which information suggesting that it is a jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state is notified, and the display pattern 1 and the display pattern 2 are predetermined. This is a display pattern (second notification pattern) in which specific information useful to the player is not notified when the conditions of the above conditions are satisfied.

For example, when the display pattern B-1 is determined, and the 1st to 4th over prizes occur in the round games after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), the first aspect is Similarly, when the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (d) is performed and the fifth over prize is generated, the same as in the first aspect, the display in FIG. 84 (e) is performed. The display as shown is performed.

On the other hand, when the display pattern B-3 is determined, in the round games after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), if the 1st to 4th over prizes occur, the first aspect is Similarly, the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (d) is performed, and when the fifth over-winning occurs, "Character 5" is displayed and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. As the characters "Clear the condition!" And the line of "Character 5" to indicate that, the current jackpot game state is the jackpot game state (first specific game state) that shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end. The characters "Probability change jackpot !?" indicating the suggestion and the number of over-winnings as a predetermined condition achieved this time are displayed. However, in this case, as the line of "Character 5", the characters "This jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot" are displayed to definitively notify that the game will shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot game state ends. You may do it. As a result, the content notified to the player does not differ significantly between the first aspect and the second aspect, so that the same notification as in the first aspect is performed in the second aspect as well. It may be.

Further, in the second aspect of the specific suggestion effect, when the effect mode of the normal game state determined to shift to the jackpot game state is the premium mode, the specific suggestion effect is not performed. Not limited to this, even in the premium mode, when shifting to 2 in the 2nd special symbol, it is possible to perform a specific suggestion effect in the rush bonus of 2 in the 2nd special symbol. May be.

<Third aspect of specific suggestion effect>
Next, the third aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83A is a diagram showing a specific suggestion effect execution determination table C of the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (modification) of the present invention, and FIG. 83B is a diagram showing another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table C of the pachinko game machine which concerns on (modification example), and (c) is the specific suggestion effect display of the pachinko game machine which concerns on another embodiment (modification example) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the content of the pattern C. In the following, the description of the part common to the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be omitted, and only the part different from the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect will be described. Further, the various changes shown in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect can also be applied to the third aspect of the specific suggestion effect.

In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 38, the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command (or has determined that the symbol stop command has been received, and the jackpot symbol stops. That is, when the jackpot game state starts, the specific suggestion effect execution decision table C shown in FIG. 83 (a) is referred to, and the specific suggestion is made regardless of the jackpot type. Decide to "execute" the production. As in (a) of FIG. 81 and (a) of FIG. 82, it may be determined whether or not to "execute" the specific suggestion effect according to the jackpot type.

When the sub CPU 71 determines to "execute" the specific suggestion effect, the sub CPU 71 subsequently refers to the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the pending jackpot type is the pending jackpot. (Probability change) (that is, when the start memory information already stored includes the start memory information for obtaining the determination result of shifting to the first specific game state), or there is a jackpot in hold (non-probability change). ) (That is, when the already stored start storage information includes the start storage information for obtaining the determination result of shifting to the second specific game state), or there is no jackpot in hold (that is, already stored). A plurality of display patterns (C-1 to C-) depending on whether the start memory information is included in the start memory information for which the determination result of shifting to the jackpot game state is obtained). One display pattern is determined from 7). The contents of the display patterns (C-1 to C-7) in the third aspect of the specific suggestion effect are as shown in FIG. 83 (c). The display pattern (C-1 to C-7) shown in FIG. 83 (c) shows an example of the display pattern as in the first aspect of the specific suggestion effect.

For example, the display pattern C-1, the display pattern C-3, and the display pattern C-5 are display patterns in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 5 as a predetermined condition, and the display pattern C-2. , And the display pattern C-4 and the display pattern C-6 are display patterns in which the number of over-winning game balls is set to 10 as a predetermined condition. Further, the display pattern C-3 and the display pattern C-4 shift to the jackpot gaming state in the start storage information already stored as specific information useful for the player when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is a display pattern (first notification pattern) in which information suggesting that information suggesting that the determination result of the operation is to be obtained is included, and the display patterns C-1 and the display pattern C-2 are predetermined conditions. It is a display pattern (second notification pattern) in which specific information useful to the player is not notified when the condition is satisfied. Further, the display patterns C-5 and the display pattern C-6 are useful for the player when the above-mentioned specific information is notified when a predetermined condition is satisfied and when an over-winning occurs. As special information, it is suggested that the start memory information can be determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) that shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The display pattern C-7 is a display pattern (third notification pattern) in which the information to be reported is notified, and the display pattern C-7 is a display pattern (third) in which the above-mentioned special information is notified regardless of whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. 4 notification pattern).

For example, when the display pattern C-1 is determined, and the 1st to 4th over prizes occur in the round games after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), the first aspect is Similarly, when the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (d) is performed and the fifth over prize is generated, the same as in the first aspect, the display in FIG. 84 (e) is performed. The display as shown is performed.

Further, when the display pattern C-3 is determined, when the 1st to 4th over prizes occur in the round games after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), the first aspect is Similarly, the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (d) is performed, and when the fifth over prize occurs, "Character 5" is displayed and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is suggested that the characters "Clear the conditions!" And the lines of "Character 5" that indicate that the current start memory information includes the one that can obtain the judgment result of shifting to the jackpot game state. The characters "Holding ball is a chance !?" and the number of over-winnings as a predetermined condition achieved this time are displayed. However, in this case, as the line of "Character 5", the text "The reserved ball contains more than the normal jackpot" is displayed, and the current start memory information is used to shift to the jackpot game state. It may be possible to definitively notify that a product for which a determination result to that effect is obtained is included.

Further, when the display pattern C-5 is determined, when the 1st to 4th over prizes occur in the round games after a specific round game (for example, the 5th round), the first aspect is Similarly, the display as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to (d) is performed, and when the fifth over prize occurs, "Character 5" is displayed and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is suggested that the characters "Clear the conditions!" And the lines of "Character 5" that indicate that the current start memory information includes the one that can obtain the judgment result of shifting to the jackpot game state. The characters "Holding ball is a chance !?" and the number of over-winnings as a predetermined condition achieved this time are displayed. In addition, when the sixth over-winning occurs, "Character 6" is displayed, and the start memory information is displayed as the dialogue of "Character 6" in the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The characters such as "Holding ball is a big chance !!" are displayed to indicate that the judgment result of shifting to the jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) is obtained. .. However, in this case, as the line of "Character 6", the characters "The hit included in the reserved ball is a probabilistic jackpot" is displayed, and the start memory information is the probabilistic game after the end of the jackpot game state. It is also possible to definitively notify that the determination result of shifting to the jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) to shift to the state is obtained.

In the third aspect of the specific suggestion effect, it was decided to "execute" the specific suggestion effect when all the jackpot game states start. When the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol is provided, it may be decided not to "execute" the specific suggestion effect in the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the jackpot game state, when the start memory information is stored and the start memory information includes the information for obtaining the determination result of shifting to the jackpot game state, the display pattern is redetermined by the sub CPU 71. The processing to be performed may be performed. That is, the notification pattern may be configured to be changeable during the jackpot game state. For example, when the jackpot game state starts, there is no jackpot in hold, and when the display pattern C-1 is determined, the game is newly stored before the start of a specific round game (for example, the 5th round). When the start memory information includes information that gives a determination result of shifting to the jackpot game state, the display pattern C-2, the display pattern C-4, or the display pattern C-6 is redetermined. You may do so. That is, the display pattern may be redetermined so that the number of over prizes as a predetermined condition is different.

Further, for example, when the jackpot gaming state starts, there is no jackpot in hold, and when the display pattern C-1 is determined, the newly stored start storage information is used to shift to the second specific gaming state. When the result of the above determination is included, the display pattern C-3 is redetermined as the display pattern, and the newly stored start memory information is determined to shift to the first specific gaming state. When the result is obtained, the display pattern C-3 or the display pattern C-5 may be redetermined as the display pattern, or (b) of FIG. 83 (b). The display pattern may be redetermined by using the specific suggestion effect display pattern determination table C shown in 1. Further, these re-determinations were made with a big hit in the hold (probability change or non-probability change), but even if the display pattern C-1 or the display pattern C-2 is determined, it may be performed. Good.

Further, for example, when the jackpot gaming state starts, there is no jackpot in hold, and when the display pattern C-1 is determined, the newly stored start storage information is used to shift to the second specific gaming state. When the result of the above judgment is included, "Character 5" is displayed in the predetermined number of over-winning numbers (for example, the 5th and 6th) after the execution of the display pattern C-1. Whether or not it may be decided by lottery. Further, in this case, the predetermined number of over prizes may also be determined by lottery. Further, although these lottery was a big hit in the hold (probability change or non-probability change), it may be performed even when the display pattern C-1 or the display pattern C-2 is determined. ..

Further, for example, when the jackpot gaming state starts, there is no jackpot in hold, and when the display pattern C-1 is determined, the newly stored start storage information is used to shift to the first specific gaming state. When the result of the above judgment is included, "Character 5" is displayed in the predetermined number of over-winning numbers (for example, the 5th and 6th) after the execution of the display pattern C-1. It may be decided by lottery whether or not or whether or not to display "Character 6". Further, in this case, the predetermined number of over prizes may also be determined by lottery. Further, when "Character 5" is displayed, whether or not to display "Character 6" may be determined by another lottery. Further, although these lottery was a big hit in the hold (probability change or non-probability change), it may be performed even when the display pattern C-1 or the display pattern C-2 is determined. ..

Further, for example, when the jackpot game state starts, there is a jackpot in hold (probability change or non-probability change), and if any of the display patterns C-3 to C-7 is determined, a new memory is stored. When the start memory information that has been recorded includes information that gives a judgment result of shifting to the jackpot game state, for example, the display mode of "Character 5" and "Character 6" and the content of the dialogue are changed to normal. May be different, or a special notification may be given so that it is notified that there are a plurality of big hits in the hold. Further, in this case, such notification may be performed by operating the above-mentioned plate B or plate D.

Further, for example, when the big hit game state starts, or when there are a plurality of big hits in the hold during the big hit game state, the above-mentioned specific information or special information is notified a plurality of times to keep the hold. The number of jackpots may be suggested. Further, in this case as well, a plurality of notifications may be performed by operating the above-mentioned plates B and D.

As described above, according to the gaming machines of other embodiments, the following gaming machines can be provided.

The gaming machine according to the other embodiment
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37) provided in the game area and capable of varying between a first mode in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted. ,
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area. When,
The specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of shifting to the specific game state.
In the specific gaming state, when the variable winning device is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect and a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game media are received in the variable winning device, the first aspect to the first aspect. A round game execution means (for example, a main CPU 61) capable of executing a round game that is varied in two modes a plurality of times, and
For each round game, a determination means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining whether or not the variable winning device has received more than the specified number of game media,
In the specific gaming state, a storage means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that stores the number of game media accepted in the variable winning device in excess of the specified number based on the determination result by the determination means.
Specific information that is useful to the player (for example, when the number of game media stored by the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a condition for displaying "character 5" shown in FIGS. 81 to 83)). , Information notifying means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) for notifying the image shown in FIG. 84 (f).
A condition determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining the predetermined condition is provided.
In the condition determining means, at least the number of game media stored by the storage means is the first number (for example, 5), or the number of game media stored by the storage means is the first number. It is possible to determine that the number is a second number (for example, 10) different from the number, as the predetermined condition.
When it is determined by the determination means that the variable winning device has received more than the specified number of gaming media by the time the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information notification means is determined by the condition determination means. The gaming machine is characterized in that it can deliver predetermined information (for example, images shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (d)) related to the specific information according to the predetermined conditions.

According to the gaming machine according to another embodiment, specific information useful to the player is notified according to the number of over-winning gaming media. Further, a predetermined condition for which this specific information is to be notified is determined from a plurality of conditions. Then, if an over-winning occurs even before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined information related to the specific information is notified. Therefore, in the specific game state (big hit game state), the motivation for over-winning can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the other embodiment
The condition determining means has a notification pattern (for example, a display shown in FIGS. 81 to 83) in which the specific information or the predetermined information is notified by the information notification means according to the number of game media stored by the storage means. It is a notification pattern determining means for determining a pattern),
The notification pattern is
Until the number of game media stored by the storage means reaches the first number or the second number, it is determined by the determination means that the variable winning device has received more game media than the specified number. Each time, the content of the predetermined information is sequentially changed and notified, and when the number of game media stored by the storage means becomes the first number or the second number, the specific The first notification pattern in which information is notified (for example, display pattern A-3 shown in FIG. 81 (c), display pattern B-3 shown in FIG. 82 (c), display pattern C- shown in FIG. 83 (c)). 3) and
Until the number of game media stored by the storage means reaches the first number or the second number, it is determined by the determination means that the variable winning device has received more game media than the specified number. Each time, the content of the predetermined information is sequentially changed and notified, and when the number of game media stored by the storage means becomes the first number or the second number, the specific A second notification pattern in which information is not notified (for example, display pattern A-1 shown in FIG. 81 (c), display pattern B-1 shown in FIG. 82 (c), display pattern C-1 shown in FIG. 83 (c)). ), And is a gaming machine characterized by including.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to another embodiment, when determining a predetermined condition, the specific information and the notification mode of the predetermined information determine a predetermined notification pattern.
The notification pattern includes a notification pattern in which specific information can be notified (first notification pattern) and a notification pattern in which specific information cannot be notified (second notification pattern). Therefore, for example, if the number of over-winning game media does not satisfy a predetermined condition, it becomes unclear which notification pattern is determined, and thus the player's willingness to over-win is increased. Can be enhanced. Further, even when the second notification pattern is determined, the game result which is disadvantageous to the player is not always determined, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the other embodiment
Further provided with a symbol display means (for example, display area 4A) for variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, decorative symbols).
The specific gaming state is
After the specific game state is completed, the first specific game state (for example, the first specific game state) is controlled to a special game state in which the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means is relatively easy to obtain. The jackpot game states of "probability change 1" to "probability change 4" shown in FIG. 80) and
After the end of the specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state that is not controlled by the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state of "normal 1" and "time saving 1" shown in FIG. 80) is included.
The symbol display means
When the gaming state is controlled to the first specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the first symbol combination (for example, the combination of the symbols of "7-7-7") or the second symbol combination is used as the symbol combination. (For example, a combination of symbols other than "7-7-7") is stopped and displayed.
When the gaming state is controlled to the second specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination.
When the game state is controlled to the first specific game state by the specific game state control means and the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means is the second symbol combination, the notification pattern determining means is used. The first notification pattern can be determined,
The information notifying means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, as the specific information, information suggesting that the special gaming state is controlled after the specific gaming state is completed is notified. It is a game machine to play.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to another embodiment, when it is not confirmed to shift to the special gaming state (probability changing gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), in the specific gaming state, When a number of over-winnings that can satisfy a predetermined condition are generated, specific information suggests that the special gaming state can be transitioned to (or is possible) after the end of the specific gaming state. The information suggested in this way is useful information for the player. Therefore, in the specific game state (big hit game state), the motivation for over-winning can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the other embodiment
The specific gaming state is
After the specific game state is completed, the first specific game state (for example, the first specific game state) is controlled to a special game state in which the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means is relatively easy to obtain. The jackpot game states of "probability change 1" to "probability change 4" shown in FIG. 80) and
After the end of the specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state controlled to a gaming state different from the special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of "normal 1" and "time saving 1" shown in FIG. 80) and Including
Further provided with an effect state determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining the effect state after the first specific game state or the second specific game state is completed from a plurality of effect states.
The effect state determining means is
The first effect state (for example, premium mode) or the second effect state (for example, challenge mode, rush mode) is determined as the effect state after the first specific game state is completed.
The second effect state is determined as the effect state after the second specific game state is completed.
The notification pattern determining means can determine the first notification pattern when the gaming state is controlled to the first specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means in the second effect state.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information notification means provides information suggesting that the specific gaming state controlled by the specific gaming state control means is the first specific gaming state as the specific information. It is a game machine characterized by notifying.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to another embodiment, in the effect state (second effect state) in which the current effect state is not determined to be the special game state (probability variation game state), the specific game state (second effect state) In the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state), if an over-winning number that can satisfy a predetermined condition is generated in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can shift to the special gaming state (specific gaming state). Specific information suggests that it is (or is likely to be) a first specific gaming state). The information suggested in this way is useful information for the player. Therefore, in the specific game state (big hit game state), the motivation for over-winning can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the other embodiment
A start storage information storage means (main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area is further provided.
The specific game state transition determination means determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state for each start memory information, and determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state.
The specific gaming state is
After the specific game state is completed, the first specific game state (for example, the first specific game state) is controlled to a special game state in which the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means is relatively easy to obtain. The jackpot game states of "probability change 1" to "probability change 4" shown in FIG. 80) and
After the end of the specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state that is not controlled by the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state of "normal 1" and "time saving 1" shown in FIG. 80) is included.
The notification pattern determining means is
Until the number of game media stored by the storage means reaches the first number or the second number, it is determined by the determination means that the variable winning device has received more game media than the specified number. Each time, the content of the predetermined information is sequentially changed and notified, and when the number of game media stored by the storage means becomes the first number or the second number, the specificity is specified. Information is notified, and when it is determined by the determination means that the variable winning device has received more than the specified number of gaming media, a third notification pattern (for example, FIG. The display pattern C-5) shown in 83 (c) can be determined.
When the gaming state is controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means is the first specific by the specific game state transition determination means. When the determination result of shifting to the gaming state is obtained, the third notification pattern can be determined.
When the gaming state is controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means is the second specific by the specific game state transition determination means. When the determination result of shifting to the gaming state is obtained, the first notification pattern can be determined.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information notification means receives the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means as the specific information by the specific game state transition determination means. In the case of notifying the information suggesting that the determination result of shifting to is obtained, and further notifying the special information, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means is used. The game machine is characterized in that it can deliver information suggesting that the determination result of shifting to the first specific gaming state can be obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to another embodiment, it is determined that in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the start storage information (so-called “holding ball”) already stored is shifted to the specific gaming state. When a result can be obtained, a notification pattern (first notification pattern) capable of transmitting specific information can be determined, and further, a specific gaming state in which the determination result can shift to the special gaming state can be determined. In the case of shifting to the (first specific gaming state), it is possible to determine a notification pattern (third notification pattern) in which special information can be notified in addition to specific information. That is, when an over-winning number that can satisfy a predetermined condition is generated in the specific game state, the current start memory information includes at least the start memory information that shifts to the specific game state. (Or the possibility) is suggested by specific information. Further, when an over-winning is further generated and special information is notified, the specific gaming state that shifts according to the start memory information is in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state) that can shift to the special gaming state. It is suggested that there is (or the possibility). The information suggested in this way is useful information for the player. Therefore, in the specific game state (big hit game state), the motivation for over-winning can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine according to this embodiment and the game machine according to other embodiments are not limited to those described above. That is, as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, the configuration described in the present embodiment, the configuration described in the modified example of the present embodiment, the configuration described in the other embodiment, and the modified example of the other embodiment The gaming machine according to the present invention can be configured by combining a part or all of the configurations described in the above, and in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the gaming machine according to another embodiment. It is also possible to configure the gaming machine according to the present invention by excluding some configurations.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 36 1st big winning opening 36A 1st big winning opening shutter 37 2nd big winning opening 37A 2nd big winning opening shutter 38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39'Displacement member 61 Main CPU
71 sub CPU
73 work RAM
83 Payout device

Claims (1)

A specific game state determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a specific game state determination means.
The effect content determining means for determining the content of the effect for notifying the determination result of the specific game state determining means, and the effect content determining means.
An effect display means that can execute the effect determined by the effect content determining means in a game in which the identification information is changed.
An effect control means for controlling an effect executed by the effect display means,
And a specific display determining means for determining a specific display whether or not to display the effect display means for indicating that the contents of the effect varies executed by the effect display means,
The effect being executed can change the content of the effect based on the specific display.
The effect contents determination means,
Among the plurality of expectation types of executable a plurality step in one game, it is possible determine the expectation type being invoked,
The specific display is defined according to each type of expectation.
The effect control means
When the specific display is not determined to be displayed by the specific display determining means and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the specific stage To execute the production corresponding to the type of expectation of
A case of displaying the previous SL specific display by performing first display corresponding to the specific display along with the specific display, expected expectations types determined by the effect determining means of the specific steps If in degrees type, the changing contents of the effects not based on the specific display on the expectations types of expectations types by remote low stage of the particular stage, the contents of the effect based on the specific display after the it is possible to perform the first effect to change the expectations kind of the particular stage,
When the content of the effect is changed based on the specific display, a second display different from the first display corresponding to the specific display is displayed together with the specific display.
When the specific display is displayed and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determining means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, the content of the effect is displayed without being based on the specific display. It is possible to perform a second effect that changes to a specific stage of expectation type,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in one game.